1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
2
3******************
4Variables Glossary
5******************
6
7This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build
8system and gives an overview of their function and contents.
9
10:term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>`
11:term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>`
12:term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>`
13:term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>`
14:term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P`
15:term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T`
16:term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>`
17:term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>`
18
19.. glossary::
20
21   :term:`ABIEXTENSION`
22      Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU
23      canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi").
24
25      ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the
26      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the
27      following extension::
28
29         ABIEXTENSION = "eabi"
30
31   :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY`
32      Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty.
33      By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default
34      behavior can cause issues when there is an
35      :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime
36      requirement on the existence of the package.
37
38      Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in
39      conjunction with a package name override, as in::
40
41         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1"
42         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1"
43         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1"
44
45   :term:`ALTERNATIVE`
46      Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming
47      scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages.
48      When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the
49      alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the
50      commands can co-exist.
51
52      To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist
53      as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package
54      has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you
55      identify them as follows::
56
57         ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket"
58
59      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
60      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
61      section.
62
63   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`
64      Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual
65      locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the
66      ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must
67      use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual
68      location::
69
70         ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/["
71
72      In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``)
73      from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``.
74
75      .. note::
76
77         If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``.
78
79      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
80      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
81      section.
82
83   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY`
84      Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for
85      duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single
86      default regardless of the command name or package, a default for
87      specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default
88      for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the
89      available syntax forms::
90
91         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority"
92         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority"
93         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority"
94
95      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
96      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
97      section.
98
99   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`
100      Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for
101      duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single
102      default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the
103      command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands
104      regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to
105      particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms::
106
107         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target"
108         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target"
109         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target"
110
111      .. note::
112
113         If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value
114         from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable.
115
116         If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the
117         same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``"
118         appended to it.
119
120         Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the
121         alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename
122         alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install`
123         task while retaining support for the command if necessary.
124
125      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
126      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
127      section.
128
129   :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`
130      When inheriting the
131      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
132      class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where
133      at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order
134      for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words,
135      if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES``
136      appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
137      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
138      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
139
140
141   :term:`APPEND`
142      An override list of append strings for each target specified with
143      :term:`LABELS`.
144
145      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
146      information on how this variable is used.
147
148   :term:`AR`
149      The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``.
150
151   :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE`
152      When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class,
153      determines the type of information used to create a released archive.
154      You can use this variable to create archives of patched source,
155      original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the
156      following variable flags (varflags)::
157
158         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"                   # Uses original (unpacked) source files.
159         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched"                    # Uses patched source files. This is the default.
160         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured"                 # Uses configured source files.
161         ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1"                         # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch.
162         ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..."    # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff.
163         ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1"                     # Uses environment data.
164         ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1"                       # Uses recipe and include files.
165         ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1"                         # Uses RPM package files.
166
167      For information on how the variable works, see the
168      ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`.
169
170   :term:`AS`
171      Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler.
172
173   :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED`
174      Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not
175      attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already
176      been built.
177
178      In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native
179      tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which
180      when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used
181      rather than building ``git-native``.
182
183   :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS`
184      Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which
185      adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the
186      system. Separate multiple entries using spaces.
187
188      As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of
189      shlibname in packagename with the optional version::
190
191         shlibname:packagename[_version]
192
193      Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1``
194      as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package::
195
196         ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation"
197
198   :term:`AUTHOR`
199      The email address used to contact the original author or authors in
200      order to send patches and forward bugs.
201
202   :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`
203      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
204      which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which
205      packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to
206      Debian library package naming.
207
208      The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to
209      act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe.
210
211   :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU`
212      Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You
213      must set this variable in your recipe. The
214      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable.
215
216   :term:`AUTOREV`
217      When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to
218      use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example::
219
220         SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
221
222      If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of
223      software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains
224      ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you
225      have a kernel recipe that inherits the
226      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous
227      statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get
228      into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe
229      so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``.
230
231      For more information see the
232      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`"
233      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
234
235   :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES`
236      List of licenses found in the directories specified by
237      :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and
238      :term:`LICENSE_PATH`.
239
240      .. note::
241
242         It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and
243         ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES``
244         is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`).
245
246   :term:`AVAILTUNES`
247      The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI)
248      tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build
249      system.
250
251      The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes
252      may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with
253      each other in a
254      :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>`
255      configuration.
256
257      To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the
258      "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the
259      "=" operator. See the
260      ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake
261      User Manual for more information.
262
263   :term:`AZ_SAS`
264      Azure Storage Shared Access Signature, when using the
265      :ref:`Azure Storage fetcher (az://) <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`
266      This variable can be defined to be used by the fetcher to authenticate
267      and gain access to non-public artifacts.
268      ::
269
270         AZ_SAS = ""se=2021-01-01&sp=r&sv=2018-11-09&sr=c&skoid=<skoid>&sig=<signature>""
271
272      For more information see Microsoft's Azure Storage documentation at
273      https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/storage/common/storage-sas-overview
274
275   :term:`B`
276      The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in
277      which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a
278      recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the
279      :term:`S` directory, which is defined as::
280
281         S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}"
282
283      You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to
284      by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support
285      separating these directories. The build system defaults to using
286      separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes.
287
288   :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`
289      Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only
290      packages are packages installed only through the
291      :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any
292      of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them
293      with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable::
294
295         BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
296
297      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
298      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
299      override::
300
301         BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name"
302
303      It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages
304      using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them
305      (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS`
306      variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and
307      will install the packages to avoid dependency errors.
308
309      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
310      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
311
312      See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the
313      :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related
314      information.
315
316   :term:`BASE_LIB`
317      The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary
318      Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib
319      context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`"
320      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information
321      on Multilib.
322
323      The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in
324      the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not
325      being used, the value defaults to "lib".
326
327   :term:`BASE_WORKDIR`
328      Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default
329      value is "${TMPDIR}/work".
330
331   :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`
332      Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed
333      to use to obtain the required source code. Following are
334      considerations surrounding this variable:
335
336      -  This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set
337         or set to "0".
338
339      -  Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of
340         host names exists. For example, the following setting matches
341         ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``.
342         ::
343
344            BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org"
345
346         .. note::
347
348            The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of
349            a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the
350            host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other
351            location of the name or combined with the front part of the
352            name.
353
354            For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar``
355            is not.
356
357      -  Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug.
358
359      -  Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure.
360
361      Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with
362      :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host
363      you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being
364      fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a
365      host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI`
366      statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the
367      host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the
368      ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs.
369
370   :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY`
371      Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file
372      (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This
373      condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core``
374      bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the
375      other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe
376      yet).
377
378      The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction
379      given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your
380      changes are no longer being applied.
381
382      You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1",
383      "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the
384      :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example::
385
386         BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1"
387
388   :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS`
389      Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows
390      you to control the build based on these parameters.
391
392      Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring,
393      add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file
394      found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the
395      following form:
396
397      .. code-block:: none
398
399         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]"
400
401         where:
402
403            action is:
404               ABORT:     Immediately abort the build when
405                          a threshold is broken.
406               STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently
407                          executing tasks have finished when
408                          a threshold is broken.
409               WARN:      Issue a warning but continue the
410                          build when a threshold is broken.
411                          Subsequent warnings are issued as
412                          defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL
413                          variable, which must be defined in
414                          the conf/local.conf file.
415
416            dir is:
417               Any directory you choose. You can specify one or
418               more directories to monitor by separating the
419               groupings with a space.  If two directories are
420               on the same device, only the first directory
421               is monitored.
422
423            threshold is:
424               Either the minimum available disk space,
425               the minimum number of free inodes, or
426               both.  You must specify at least one.  To
427               omit one or the other, simply omit the value.
428               Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes,
429               Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do
430               not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by
431               default.  Do not use GB, MB, or KB.
432
433      Here are some examples::
434
435         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
436         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G"
437         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K"
438
439      The first example works only if you also provide the
440      :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`
441      variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build
442      system to immediately abort when either the disk space in
443      ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops
444      below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the
445      variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space
446      in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number
447      of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued
448      during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL``
449      variable.
450
451      The second example stops the build after all currently executing
452      tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}``
453      directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free
454      inodes in this case.
455
456      The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of
457      free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No
458      disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case.
459
460   :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`
461      Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these
462      intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in
463      the :term:`Build Directory`.
464
465      If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you
466      must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS`
467      variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build,
468      subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free
469      inodes further reduces by the respective interval.
470
471      If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you
472      do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk
473      monitoring interval defaults to the following::
474
475         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
476
477      When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the
478      following form:
479
480      .. code-block:: none
481
482         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval"
483
484         where:
485
486            disk_space_interval is:
487               An interval of memory expressed in either
488               G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
489               respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
490
491            disk_inode_interval is:
492               An interval of free inodes expressed in either
493               G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
494               respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
495
496      Here is an example::
497
498         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
499         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
500
501      These variables cause the
502      OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the
503      available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of
504      free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}``
505      directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time
506      a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1
507      Gbytes and 100 Kbytes).
508
509   :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
510      Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git
511      repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the
512      :term:`DL_DIR` directory.
513
514      For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these
515      repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build
516      system.
517      ::
518
519         BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
520
521      Set this variable in your
522      ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`.
523
524      Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can
525      clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other
526      source control work directories.
527
528   :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`
529      The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one
530      time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this
531      variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For
532      example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses
533      hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default
534      to "4".
535
536      For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to
537      override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds.
538      However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical
539      CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable
540      is not set higher than "20".
541
542      For more information on speeding up builds, see the
543      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`"
544      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
545
546   :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`
547      Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake
548      server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how
549      long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations.
550
551      For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file
552      instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity::
553
554         BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20"
555
556      If you want the server to never be unloaded,
557      set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1".
558
559   :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND`
560      Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the
561      software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like
562      ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build
563      system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to
564      run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target
565      :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK
566      machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form
567      "``multilib:``\ multilib_name".
568
569      To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of
570      code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe::
571
572         BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk"
573         BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name"
574
575      .. note::
576
577         Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe
578         variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such
579         as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of
580         a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten
581         to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native".
582
583         Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once.
584         Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not
585         possible to include a different file depending on the variant,
586         since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is
587         parsed.
588
589   :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS`
590      Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find
591      the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append
592      its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file.
593
594   :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN`
595      Variable that expands to match files from
596      :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable
597      is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the
598      name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``).
599
600   :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`
601      Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer.
602
603      This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears
604      in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to
605      prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe
606      - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple
607      layers. The precedence established through this variable stands
608      regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For
609      example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for
610      which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still
611      has a lower precedence.
612
613      A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a
614      higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence
615      than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable
616      is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable
617      for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a
618      layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1
619      if no priorities are defined).
620
621      .. tip::
622
623         You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers``
624         to list all configured layers along with their priorities.
625
626   :term:`BBFILES`
627      A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build
628      software.
629
630      When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's
631      `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax.
632      For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the
633      previous link.
634
635   :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC`
636      Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify
637      the layers by the collections that the layers define.
638
639      Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files
640      whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to
641      modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to
642      introduce a hard dependency on those other layers.
643
644      Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``:
645      collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two
646      collection names and two filename patterns::
647
648         BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \
649            clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \
650            core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \
651            "
652
653      This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid
654      entries are found, which cause parsing to abort:
655
656      .. code-block:: none
657
658         ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not:
659             /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend
660             /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend
661
662   :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS`
663      Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure.
664
665   :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES`
666      If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the
667      maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when
668      reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``,
669      the entire log is printed.
670
671   :term:`BBLAYERS`
672      Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined
673      in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`.
674      Here is an example::
675
676         BBLAYERS = " \
677             /home/scottrif/poky/meta \
678             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \
679             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
680             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \
681             "
682
683      This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom,
684      user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``.
685
686   :term:`BBMASK`
687      Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files.
688
689      You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and
690      ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append
691      files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not
692      see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or
693      otherwise used by BitBake.
694
695      The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression
696      compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular
697      Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full
698      paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's
699      documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax.
700
701      The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell
702      BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the
703      ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory::
704
705         BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/"
706
707      If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can
708      specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example
709      masks out multiple directories and individual recipes::
710
711         BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/"
712         BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/"
713         BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap"
714         BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend"
715         BBMASK += "lzma"
716
717      .. note::
718
719         When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character
720         to ensure you match just that directory name.
721
722   :term:`BBMULTICONFIG`
723      Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are
724      building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in
725      your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a
726      multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For
727      example, the following line specifies three configuration files::
728
729         BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC"
730
731      Each configuration file you
732      use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory`
733      ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g.
734      build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``).
735
736      For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment
737      that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the
738      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`"
739      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
740
741   :term:`BBPATH`
742      Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This
743      variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable.
744
745      .. note::
746
747         If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the
748         :term:`Build Directory`, you must be sure to set ``BBPATH``
749         to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any
750         environment variable and then run BitBake::
751
752                 $ BBPATH = "build_directory"
753                 $ export BBPATH
754                 $ bitbake target
755
756
757   :term:`BBSERVER`
758      If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the
759      BitBake remote server.
760
761      Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake
762      environment::
763
764         export BBSERVER=localhost:$port
765
766      By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in
767      :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`.
768      Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency
769      data.
770
771   :term:`BINCONFIG`
772      When inheriting the
773      :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class,
774      this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in
775      favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The
776      ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to
777      return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and
778      replaced.
779
780      To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example
781      from the ``libpng`` recipe::
782
783         BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config"
784
785   :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB`
786      When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class,
787      this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that
788      need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have
789      been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when
790      installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other
791      recipes.
792
793      .. note::
794
795         The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses
796         `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__,
797         which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern
798         matching. Shell globbing is very similar to
799         `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__
800         and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__.
801
802      For more information on how this variable works, see
803      ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
804      You can also find general
805      information on the class in the
806      ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section.
807
808   :term:`BP`
809      The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name
810      suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is
811      comprised of the following::
812
813         ${BPN}-${PV}
814
815   :term:`BPN`
816      This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with
817      common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``,
818      ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``.
819      The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the
820      :term:`MLPREFIX` and
821      :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables,
822      respectively.
823
824   :term:`BUGTRACKER`
825      Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe.
826      The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the
827      variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being
828      built needs to be manually reported.
829
830   :term:`BUILD_ARCH`
831      Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The
832      OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the
833      machine name reported by the ``uname`` command.
834
835   :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH`
836      Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build
837      host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty.
838
839   :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`
840      Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build
841      host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty.
842
843   :term:`BUILD_CCLD`
844      Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C
845      compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD``
846      points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of
847      :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming
848      ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set.
849
850   :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS`
851      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
852      build host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
853      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
854      default.
855
856   :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS`
857      Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C
858      and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When
859      building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS`
860      is set to the value of this variable by default.
861
862   :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS`
863      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
864      build host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
865      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
866      by default.
867
868   :term:`BUILD_FC`
869      Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By
870      default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the
871      value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming
872      ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set.
873
874   :term:`BUILD_LD`
875      Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default,
876      ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments
877      the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming
878      ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set.
879
880   :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`
881      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By
882      default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty.
883
884   :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS`
885      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build
886      host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
887      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
888      by default.
889
890   :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`
891      Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when
892      building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through
893      the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and
894      :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values.
895
896      The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2
897      -pipe".
898
899   :term:`BUILD_OS`
900      Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g.
901      "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of
902      ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the
903      first word, converted to lower-case characters.
904
905   :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`
906      The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded
907      build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the
908      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for
909      ``native`` recipes.
910
911   :term:`BUILD_STRIP`
912      Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from
913      binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP``
914      points to
915      ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``.
916
917   :term:`BUILD_SYS`
918      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
919      system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building
920      ``native`` recipes).
921
922      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
923      on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`,
924      :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and
925      :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the
926      ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself.
927
928   :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`
929      Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host.
930      The default value is an empty string ("").
931
932   :term:`BUILDDIR`
933      Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`.
934      You can define this directory indirectly through the
935      :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build
936      Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do
937      not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to
938      ``build`` in the current directory.
939
940   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT`
941      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
942      class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build
943      history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local
944      repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory``
945      class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each
946      top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages,
947      and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time,
948      you should set this value to "1".
949
950      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build
951      history output in a local Git repository::
952
953         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0"
954
955   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`
956      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
957      class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit.
958      In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the
959      :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must
960      be set to "1".
961
962      Git requires that the value you provide for the
963      ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name
964      email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid
965      does not produce an error.
966
967      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows::
968
969         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>"
970
971   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR`
972      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
973      class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history
974      information is kept. For more information on how the variable works,
975      see the ``buildhistory.class``.
976
977      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows::
978
979         BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory"
980
981   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES`
982      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
983      class, this variable specifies the build history features to be
984      enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the
985      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`"
986      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
987
988      You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list:
989
990      -  *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the
991         list of installed packages among other things.
992
993      -  *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages.
994
995      -  *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit
996         (SDK).
997
998      -  *task:* Save output file signatures for
999         :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>`
1000         (sstate) tasks.
1001         This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for
1002         each file staged (i.e. the output of the task).
1003
1004      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following
1005      features::
1006
1007         BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk"
1008
1009   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES`
1010      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
1011      class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from
1012      the image contents into the build history directory under an
1013      "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you
1014      can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy
1015      ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for
1016      changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include
1017      any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error.
1018      Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present.
1019
1020      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the
1021      following files::
1022
1023         BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group"
1024
1025   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`
1026      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
1027      class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to
1028      which build history pushes Git changes. In order for
1029      ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work,
1030      :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to
1031      "1".
1032
1033      The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a
1034      repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name
1035      that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local
1036      repository.
1037
1038      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows::
1039
1040         BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= ""
1041
1042   :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS`
1043      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
1044      SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1045      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
1046      default.
1047
1048   :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS`
1049      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
1050      C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in
1051      the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set
1052      to the value of this variable by default.
1053
1054   :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS`
1055      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
1056      SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1057      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
1058      by default.
1059
1060   :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS`
1061      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK.
1062      When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1063      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
1064      by default.
1065
1066   :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE`
1067      Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics
1068      when you use and enable the
1069      :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The
1070      ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to
1071      ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``.
1072
1073   :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`
1074      For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output
1075      executable file into two parts: one for features that require
1076      ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that
1077      do not require ``setuid root``).
1078
1079      The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in
1080      splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get
1081      a single output executable file.
1082
1083   :term:`CACHE`
1084      Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the
1085      :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time
1086      BitBake is started.
1087
1088   :term:`CC`
1089      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler.
1090
1091   :term:`CFLAGS`
1092      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is
1093      exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the
1094      software being built during the compilation step.
1095
1096      Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1097      being built:
1098
1099      -  :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the
1100         target
1101
1102      -  :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the
1103         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1104
1105      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for
1106         an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1107
1108   :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`
1109      An internal variable specifying the special class override that
1110      should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so
1111      forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g.
1112      :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`,
1113      :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the
1114      variable to appropriate values.
1115
1116      .. note::
1117
1118         ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the
1119         ``bitbake.conf`` file.
1120
1121      As an example, the following override allows you to install extra
1122      files, but only when building for the target::
1123
1124         do_install_append_class-target() {
1125             install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir}
1126         }
1127
1128      Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to
1129      "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not
1130      building for the build host::
1131
1132         FOO_class-native = "native"
1133         FOO = "other"
1134
1135      The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply
1136      that it is included in the default value of
1137      :term:`OVERRIDES`.
1138
1139   :term:`CLEANBROKEN`
1140      If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the
1141      ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built.
1142      Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run
1143      ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`
1144      task, which is the default behavior.
1145
1146   :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`
1147      Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both
1148      :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and
1149      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of
1150      features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at
1151      the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the
1152      "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be
1153      optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports
1154      Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it.
1155
1156   :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`
1157      Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the
1158      :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license
1159      files reside.
1160
1161   :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST`
1162      A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the
1163      recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is
1164      non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression
1165      is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the
1166      variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with
1167      which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is
1168      particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase
1169      parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not
1170      compatible with the current system.
1171
1172   :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE`
1173      A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines
1174      with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched
1175      against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use
1176      the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which
1177      the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly
1178      useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing
1179      speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible
1180      with the current machine.
1181
1182   :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`
1183      Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary
1184      packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in
1185      an image.
1186
1187      .. note::
1188
1189         The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching
1190         (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__),
1191         which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion
1192         (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__).
1193
1194      The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an
1195      item that can be added to
1196      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of
1197      this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``
1198      will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development
1199      files) for every package in the image.
1200
1201      To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag
1202      to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the
1203      wildcard. Here is an example::
1204
1205         COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev'
1206
1207   :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR`
1208      Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build
1209      system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific
1210      sysroots for other recipes.
1211
1212      The default is
1213      "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``."
1214      (i.e.
1215      "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``").
1216
1217   :term:`CONF_VERSION`
1218      Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e.
1219      ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time
1220      ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes.
1221
1222   :term:`CONFFILES`
1223      Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package.
1224      If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update
1225      packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration
1226      files you have changed after the original installation and that you
1227      now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words,
1228      editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset
1229      as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES``
1230      variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent
1231      the PMS from overwriting during this update process.
1232
1233      To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override
1234      that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a
1235      space-separated list of files. Here is an example::
1236
1237         CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \
1238             ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3"
1239
1240      A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES``
1241      variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of
1242      the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files
1243      you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that
1244      the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must
1245      already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES``
1246      variable.
1247
1248      .. note::
1249
1250         When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is
1251         good practice to use appropriate path variables.
1252         For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}``
1253         rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at
1254         the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the
1255         :term:`Source Directory`.
1256
1257   :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`
1258      Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The
1259      OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig
1260      variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set
1261      to null ("").
1262
1263      The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive
1264      with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and
1265      files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain
1266      a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories
1267      should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs
1268      image. Files should contain entries according to the format described
1269      by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree.
1270
1271      If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image
1272      will be the aggregate of all of them.
1273
1274      For information on creating an initramfs, see the
1275      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
1276      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
1277
1278   :term:`CONFIG_SITE`
1279      A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to
1280      the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities
1281      when running ``configure``.
1282
1283   :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS`
1284      The minimal arguments for GNU configure.
1285
1286   :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`
1287      When inheriting the
1288      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
1289      class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be
1290      in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the
1291      ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also
1292      appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
1293      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
1294      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
1295
1296   :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1297      A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source
1298      archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In
1299      other words, if a license in a recipe's
1300      :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of
1301      ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the
1302      class.
1303
1304      .. note::
1305
1306         The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the
1307         :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable.
1308
1309      The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for
1310      ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the
1311      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1312      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1313
1314   :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE`
1315      A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived
1316      by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other
1317      words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE`
1318      value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its
1319      source is archived by the class.
1320
1321      The default value is set by the
1322      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1323      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes
1324      "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*".
1325
1326   :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`
1327      A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the
1328      :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The
1329      ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and
1330      exclusion caused through the
1331      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and
1332      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1333      variables, respectively.
1334
1335      The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude
1336      any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the
1337      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1338      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1339
1340   :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`
1341      A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the
1342      :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The
1343      ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and
1344      exclusion caused through the
1345      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and
1346      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1347      variables, respectively.
1348
1349      The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include
1350      any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the
1351      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1352      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1353
1354   :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`
1355      A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source
1356      archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class.
1357      Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``,
1358      ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``.
1359
1360      The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES``
1361      is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>`
1362      class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1363
1364   :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS`
1365      If set to "1" along with the
1366      :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the
1367      OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files,
1368      which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each
1369      package. The license files are placed in directories within the image
1370      itself during build time.
1371
1372      .. note::
1373
1374         The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for
1375         newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for
1376         read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the
1377         :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information.
1378         You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
1379         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for
1380         information on providing license text.
1381
1382   :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`
1383      If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license
1384      manifest for the image to
1385      ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image
1386      itself during build time.
1387
1388      .. note::
1389
1390         The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for
1391         newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for
1392         read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the
1393         :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information.
1394         You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
1395         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for
1396         information on providing license text.
1397
1398   :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL`
1399      Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should
1400      only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found
1401      in the :term:`Build Directory`.
1402
1403      This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer
1404      supported.
1405
1406   :term:`COREBASE`
1407      Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata
1408      layer (i.e. ``meta``).
1409
1410      It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent
1411      of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you
1412      have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name
1413      for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE``
1414      points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of
1415      the ``poky/meta`` layer.
1416
1417   :term:`COREBASE_FILES`
1418      Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that
1419      should be copied other than the layers listed in the
1420      ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for
1421      the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system
1422      into the extensible SDK.
1423
1424      Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it
1425      typically contains build directories and other files that should not
1426      normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value
1427      of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that
1428      are actually needed.
1429
1430   :term:`CPP`
1431      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor.
1432
1433   :term:`CPPFLAGS`
1434      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
1435      C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment
1436      variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the
1437      compilation step.
1438
1439      Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1440      being built:
1441
1442      -  :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for
1443         the target
1444
1445      -  :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the
1446         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1447
1448      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building
1449         for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1450
1451   :term:`CROSS_COMPILE`
1452      The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The
1453      ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the
1454      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable.
1455
1456      .. note::
1457
1458         The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE``
1459         variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel
1460         and kernel module recipes).
1461
1462   :term:`CVSDIR`
1463      The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are
1464      stored.
1465
1466   :term:`CXX`
1467      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler.
1468
1469   :term:`CXXFLAGS`
1470      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is
1471      exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the
1472      software being built during the compilation step.
1473
1474      Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1475      being built:
1476
1477      -  :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for
1478         the target
1479
1480      -  :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the
1481         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1482
1483      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building
1484         for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1485
1486   :term:`D`
1487      The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory`
1488      where components are installed by the
1489      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults
1490      to::
1491
1492         ${WORKDIR}/image
1493
1494      .. note::
1495
1496         Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under
1497         :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`.
1498
1499   :term:`DATE`
1500      The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month,
1501      and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015).
1502
1503   :term:`DATETIME`
1504      The date and time on which the current build started. The format is
1505      suitable for timestamps.
1506
1507   :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`
1508      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
1509      which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a
1510      particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library
1511      package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you
1512      set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe::
1513
1514         DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1"
1515
1516   :term:`DEBIANNAME`
1517      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
1518      which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override
1519      the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library
1520      name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an
1521      override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the
1522      ``dbus`` recipe::
1523
1524         DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1"
1525
1526   :term:`DEBUG_BUILD`
1527      Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This
1528      influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable.
1529
1530   :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`
1531      The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when
1532      compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O
1533      -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe".
1534
1535   :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`
1536      Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority.
1537
1538      The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within
1539      a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the
1540      variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build
1541      by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to
1542      build the development version.
1543
1544      .. note::
1545
1546         The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden
1547         by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two
1548         layers that contain different versions of the same recipe.
1549
1550   :term:`DEFAULTTUNE`
1551      The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e.
1552      the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The
1553      ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define
1554      :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`.
1555
1556      The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the
1557      machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override
1558      the setting using available tunes as defined with
1559      :term:`AVAILTUNES`.
1560
1561   :term:`DEPENDS`
1562      Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on
1563      other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are
1564      needed by the recipe at build time.
1565
1566      As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following
1567      assignment::
1568
1569          DEPENDS = "bar"
1570
1571      The practical effect of the previous
1572      assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in
1573      the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the
1574      :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the
1575      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs.
1576      This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on
1577      the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of
1578      each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a
1579      ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]``
1580      declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class.
1581
1582      .. note::
1583
1584         It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST``
1585         explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are
1586         configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots.
1587
1588      As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities
1589      that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe
1590      that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen``
1591      might have the following::
1592
1593         DEPENDS = "codegen-native"
1594
1595      For more
1596      information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and
1597      the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable.
1598
1599      .. note::
1600
1601         -  ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise,
1602            it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which
1603            usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as
1604            "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo"
1605            instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make
1606            up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the
1607            sysroot.
1608
1609         -  One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by
1610            itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages
1611            produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the
1612            ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
1613            section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual,
1614            runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning
1615            ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes.
1616
1617         -  Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for
1618            recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if
1619            ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against
1620            ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both
1621            ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot.
1622            Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo``
1623            to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might
1624            fail to link against ``libfoo``.
1625
1626      For information on runtime dependencies, see the
1627      :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the
1628      ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and
1629      ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the
1630      BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and
1631      dependencies.
1632
1633   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`
1634      Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to
1635      place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready
1636      to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory
1637      resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as
1638      ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``.
1639
1640      For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see
1641      ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section.
1642      For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the
1643      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`",
1644      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and
1645      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the
1646      Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1647
1648   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`
1649      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1650      Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build
1651      system. This variable applies only when
1652      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1653      "package_deb".
1654
1655      The BitBake configuration file initially defines the
1656      ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of
1657      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`::
1658
1659         DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb"
1660
1661      The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the
1662      ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the
1663      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task
1664      writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more
1665      information on how packaging works, see the
1666      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1667      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1668
1669   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
1670      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1671      images and other associated output files that are ready to be
1672      deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific
1673      as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory
1674      resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as
1675      ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``.
1676
1677      For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see
1678      ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section.
1679      For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the
1680      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and
1681      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in
1682      the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1683
1684   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`
1685      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1686      IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system.
1687      This variable applies only when
1688      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1689      "package_ipk".
1690
1691      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1692      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`::
1693
1694         DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk"
1695
1696      The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the
1697      ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the
1698      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task
1699      writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1700      on how packaging works, see the
1701      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1702      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1703
1704   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`
1705      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1706      RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system.
1707      This variable applies only when
1708      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1709      "package_rpm".
1710
1711      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1712      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`::
1713
1714         DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm"
1715
1716      The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the
1717      ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the
1718      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task
1719      writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1720      on how packaging works, see the
1721      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1722      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1723
1724   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`
1725      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1726      tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This
1727      variable applies only when
1728      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1729      "package_tar".
1730
1731      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1732      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`::
1733
1734         DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar"
1735
1736      The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the
1737      ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the
1738      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task
1739      writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1740      on how packaging works, see the
1741      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1742      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1743
1744   :term:`DEPLOYDIR`
1745      When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the
1746      ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that
1747      is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows::
1748
1749         DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}"
1750
1751      Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be
1752      deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying
1753      them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
1754      afterwards.
1755
1756   :term:`DESCRIPTION`
1757      The package description used by package managers. If not set,
1758      ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY`
1759      variable.
1760
1761   :term:`DISTRO`
1762      The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name
1763      of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
1764      variable.
1765
1766      The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration
1767      file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose
1768      filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution
1769      configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf``
1770      and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the
1771      :term:`Source Directory`.
1772
1773      Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as
1774      follows::
1775
1776         DISTRO = "poky"
1777
1778      Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro``
1779      directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the
1780      distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain
1781      spaces, and is typically all lower-case.
1782
1783      .. note::
1784
1785         If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations
1786         are used, which are specified within
1787         ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory.
1788
1789   :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME`
1790      Specifies a codename for the distribution being built.
1791
1792   :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
1793      Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images.
1794      This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the
1795      variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that
1796      include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep
1797      distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro
1798      variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file.
1799
1800   :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
1801      Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if
1802      the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g.
1803      kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but
1804      you can remove them.
1805
1806   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
1807      The software support you want in your distribution for various
1808      features. You define your distribution features in the distribution
1809      configuration file.
1810
1811      In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in
1812      ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied
1813      to the configure script during the
1814      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that
1815      optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in
1816      ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the
1817      target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support
1818      enabled.
1819
1820      Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete
1821      list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can
1822      provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section.
1823
1824   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`
1825      Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in
1826      ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``.
1827
1828      This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is
1829      not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference
1830      the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for
1831      all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section
1832      for more information.
1833
1834   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
1835      Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be
1836      backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See
1837      the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information.
1838
1839   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`
1840      A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro
1841      features with the exception of any features specific to the C library
1842      (``libc``).
1843
1844      When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be
1845      able to reuse the default
1846      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the
1847      need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses
1848      ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file::
1849
1850         DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature"
1851
1852   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE`
1853      Specifies a list of features that if present in the target
1854      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be
1855      included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This
1856      variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the
1857      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE`
1858      variable.
1859
1860   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK`
1861      Specifies a list of features that if present in the target
1862      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be
1863      included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This
1864      variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the
1865      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK`
1866      variable.
1867
1868   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE`
1869      Specifies a list of features that should be included in
1870      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native
1871      recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered
1872      using the
1873      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE`
1874      variable.
1875
1876   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK`
1877      Specifies a list of features that should be included in
1878      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building
1879      nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features
1880      filtered using the
1881      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK`
1882      variable.
1883
1884   :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
1885      The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name
1886      of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable.
1887
1888      The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution
1889      configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's
1890      argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the
1891      distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named
1892      ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory
1893      of the :term:`Source Directory`.
1894
1895      Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set
1896      as follows::
1897
1898         DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)"
1899
1900      Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro``
1901      directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the
1902      distribution configuration.
1903
1904      .. note::
1905
1906         If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default
1907         configurations are used, which are specified within
1908         ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory.
1909
1910   :term:`DISTRO_VERSION`
1911      The version of the distribution.
1912
1913   :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES`
1914      A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current
1915      distribution. By default, this list includes the value of
1916      :term:`DISTRO`.
1917
1918      You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should
1919      apply to the distribution.
1920
1921      The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it
1922      is included in the default value of
1923      :term:`OVERRIDES`.
1924
1925   :term:`DISTUTILS_SETUP_PATH`
1926      When used by recipes that inherit the
1927      :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>` or
1928      :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>` class, this variable should
1929      be used to specify the directory in which the ``setup.py`` file is
1930      located if it is not at the root of the source tree (as specified by
1931      :term:`S`). For example, in a recipe where the sources are fetched from
1932      a Git repository and ``setup.py`` is in a ``python/pythonmodule``
1933      subdirectory, you would have this::
1934
1935         S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
1936         DISTUTILS_SETUP_PATH = "${S}/python/pythonmodule"
1937
1938   :term:`DL_DIR`
1939      The central download directory used by the build process to store
1940      downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring
1941      for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git
1942      repositories, use the
1943      :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
1944      variable.
1945
1946      You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the
1947      ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you
1948      should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is
1949      ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`.
1950      ::
1951
1952         #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads"
1953
1954      To specify a different download directory,
1955      simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory.
1956
1957      During a first build, the system downloads many different source code
1958      tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a
1959      while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are
1960      all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build
1961      system looks there first to find source tarballs.
1962
1963      .. note::
1964
1965         When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to
1966         speed up this part of subsequent builds.
1967
1968      You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the
1969      same development machine. For additional information on how the build
1970      process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy
1971      server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`"
1972      chapter. You can also refer to the
1973      ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`"
1974      Wiki page.
1975
1976   :term:`DOC_COMPRESS`
1977      When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>`
1978      class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the
1979      OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By
1980      default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies
1981      available are xz and bz2.
1982
1983      For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the
1984      comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file.
1985
1986   :term:`EFI_PROVIDER`
1987      When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or
1988      ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the
1989      ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The
1990      default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead.
1991
1992      See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and
1993      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more
1994      information.
1995
1996   :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION`
1997      Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated
1998      during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or
1999      less).
2000
2001   :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR`
2002      When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>`
2003      class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by
2004      the :ref:`error reporting
2005      tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which
2006      allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central
2007      database. By default, the value of this variable is
2008      ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``.
2009
2010      You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error
2011      reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your
2012      ``local.conf`` file::
2013
2014         ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
2015
2016   :term:`ERROR_QA`
2017      Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as
2018      errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in
2019      your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you
2020      can control with this variable, see the
2021      ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section.
2022
2023   :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`
2024      Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to
2025      exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries.
2026
2027      .. note::
2028
2029         The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from
2030         the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the
2031         :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared
2032         libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between
2033         packages.
2034
2035      The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the
2036      :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a
2037      package's particular libraries only and not the whole package.
2038
2039      Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a
2040      particular package::
2041
2042         EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1"
2043
2044   :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`
2045      Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e.
2046      ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and
2047      builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the
2048      ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file.
2049
2050      To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the
2051      variable to "1" in the recipe.
2052
2053      .. note::
2054
2055         Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a
2056         world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding
2057         a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not
2058         explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build.
2059
2060   :term:`EXTENDPE`
2061      Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's
2062      version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE``
2063      is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that
2064      value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1").
2065      If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero,
2066      ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "".
2067
2068      See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example.
2069
2070   :term:`EXTENDPKGV`
2071      The full package version specification as it appears on the final
2072      packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used
2073      to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another
2074      package in the same recipe::
2075
2076         RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
2077
2078      The dependency relationships are intended to force the package
2079      manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step.
2080
2081   :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`
2082      When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these
2083      tools are not in the source tree.
2084
2085      When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over
2086      any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS``
2087      variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed
2088      external tools. See the
2089      :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in
2090      ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used.
2091
2092   :term:`EXTERNALSRC`
2093      When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>`
2094      class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of
2095      the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the
2096      :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build
2097      system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code.
2098
2099      For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the
2100      ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You
2101      can also find information on how to use this variable in the
2102      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`"
2103      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2104
2105   :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD`
2106      When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>`
2107      class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's
2108      source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build
2109      system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable,
2110      which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build
2111      Directory.
2112
2113      For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the
2114      ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You
2115      can also find information on how to use this variable in the
2116      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`"
2117      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2118
2119   :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF`
2120      For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>`
2121      class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to
2122      pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the
2123      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task.
2124
2125      The default value is "--exclude=autopoint".
2126
2127   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
2128      A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing
2129      more than one feature, separate them with a space.
2130
2131      Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file,
2132      which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`.
2133      Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best
2134      practices dictate that you do not.
2135
2136      .. note::
2137
2138         To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the
2139         :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable.
2140
2141      Here are some examples of features you can add:
2142
2143        - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including
2144          symbol information for debugging and profiling.
2145
2146        - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and
2147          enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and
2148          'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`"
2149          section for more information.
2150        - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is
2151          useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image.
2152        - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is
2153          read-only. See the
2154          ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`"
2155          section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more
2156          information
2157        - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace.
2158        - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make,
2159          pkgconfig and so forth.
2160        - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools
2161          such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth.
2162
2163      For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto
2164      Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section.
2165
2166      For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this
2167      variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``"
2168      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2169
2170   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD`
2171      Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has
2172      been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting
2173      this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is
2174      an example::
2175
2176         EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096"
2177
2178   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`
2179      A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for
2180      installing into the root filesystem.
2181
2182      Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not
2183      needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS``
2184      variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A
2185      typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration.
2186
2187      .. note::
2188
2189         To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various
2190         :term:`RDEPENDS` and :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables.
2191
2192   :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH`
2193      A list of subdirectories of
2194      ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}``
2195      added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an
2196      example, the following prepends
2197      "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to
2198      ``PATH``::
2199
2200         EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar"
2201
2202   :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE`
2203      Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the
2204      :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information.
2205
2206   :term:`EXTRA_OECONF`
2207      Additional ``configure`` script options. See
2208      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for
2209      additional information on passing configure script options.
2210
2211   :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`
2212      Additional GNU ``make`` options.
2213
2214      Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the
2215      variable to specify any required GNU options.
2216
2217      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and
2218      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of
2219      ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags.
2220
2221   :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS`
2222      When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this
2223      variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass
2224      to the ``scons`` command line.
2225
2226   :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`
2227      When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>`
2228      class, this variable provides image level user and group operations.
2229      This is a more global method of providing user and group
2230      configuration as compared to using the
2231      :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and
2232      group configurations to a specific recipe.
2233
2234      The set list of commands you can configure using the
2235      ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These
2236      commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names::
2237
2238         # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
2239         # useradd -p '' tester; \
2240         # groupadd developers; \
2241         # userdel nobody; \
2242         # groupdel -g video; \
2243         # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \
2244         # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \
2245         # "
2246
2247      Additionally there is a special ``passwd-expire`` command that will
2248      cause the password for a user to be expired and thus force changing it
2249      on first login, for example::
2250
2251         EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS += " useradd myuser; passwd-expire myuser;"
2252
2253      .. note::
2254
2255         At present, ``passwd-expire`` may only work for remote logins when
2256         using OpenSSH and not dropbear as an SSH server.
2257
2258   :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES`
2259      Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific
2260      item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
2261      When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of
2262      the feature item as an override. Here is an example::
2263
2264         FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2"
2265
2266      In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``,
2267      package1 and package2 would be included in the image.
2268
2269      .. note::
2270
2271         Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES``
2272         are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not
2273         confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which
2274         are discussed elsewhere in the documentation.
2275
2276   :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI`
2277      Points to the base URL of the server and location within the
2278      document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by
2279      OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set
2280      this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
2281
2282      Consider the following example::
2283
2284         FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir"
2285
2286      This example assumes you are serving
2287      your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory
2288      named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's
2289      document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates
2290      a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with
2291      the feed.
2292
2293   :term:`FILES`
2294      The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The
2295      :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages
2296      generated by a recipe.
2297
2298      To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that
2299      identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated
2300      list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as
2301      part of the resulting package. Here is an example::
2302
2303         FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile"
2304
2305      .. note::
2306
2307         -  When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using
2308            Python's
2309            `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_
2310            syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by
2311            following the previous link.
2312
2313         -  When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is
2314            good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example,
2315            use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}``
2316            rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these
2317            variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in
2318            the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also
2319            find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in
2320            this file.
2321
2322      If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are
2323      editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the
2324      package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you
2325      can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See
2326      the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on
2327      how to identify these files to the PMS.
2328
2329   :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV`
2330      Defines the file specification to match
2331      :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words,
2332      ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development
2333      symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform.
2334
2335      The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is
2336      set::
2337
2338         FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
2339
2340   :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS`
2341      Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
2342      looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append
2343      files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes
2344      are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH`
2345      variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using
2346      ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``.
2347
2348      Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using
2349      ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you
2350      prepend paths as follows::
2351
2352         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
2353
2354      In the above example, the build system first
2355      looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the
2356      corresponding append file.
2357
2358      .. note::
2359
2360         When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate
2361         expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that
2362         BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the
2363         directive is encountered rather than at some later time when
2364         expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the
2365         files you need.
2366
2367         Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are
2368         prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you
2369         are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories
2370         to the search path.
2371
2372      Here is another common use::
2373
2374         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:"
2375
2376      In this example, the build system extends the
2377      ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is
2378      in the same directory as the corresponding append file.
2379
2380      This next example specifically adds three paths::
2381
2382         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:"
2383
2384      A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include
2385      a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful
2386      in a BSP layer::
2387
2388          FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
2389
2390      The previous statement appears in the
2391      ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the
2392      :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in
2393      ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine
2394      override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`
2395      definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines.
2396
2397      .. note::
2398
2399         For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be
2400         the value of ``MACHINE``.
2401
2402      By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append
2403      files that reside in different layers but are used for the same
2404      recipe to correctly extend the path.
2405
2406   :term:`FILESOVERRIDES`
2407      A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the
2408      OpenEmbedded build system for creating
2409      :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable
2410      uses overrides to automatically extend the
2411      :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how
2412      that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable
2413      description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides
2414      are handled in the
2415      ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`"
2416      section of the BitBake User Manual.
2417
2418      By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as::
2419
2420         FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}"
2421
2422      .. note::
2423
2424         Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up
2425         with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the
2426         build system.
2427
2428   :term:`FILESPATH`
2429      The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses
2430      when searching for patches and files.
2431
2432      During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in
2433      ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and
2434      patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's
2435      :term:`SRC_URI` statements.
2436
2437      The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the
2438      ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the
2439      :term:`Source Directory`::
2440
2441         FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \
2442             "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}"
2443
2444      The
2445      ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides
2446      from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable.
2447
2448      .. note::
2449
2450         -  Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the
2451            build system to look in directories other than the defaults,
2452            extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the
2453            :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable.
2454
2455         -  Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map
2456            to directories in custom layers where append files
2457            (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find
2458            patches or files that reside with your append files, you need
2459            to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the
2460            ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable.
2461
2462      You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For
2463      example, consider a case where the following directory structure
2464      exists for general and machine-specific configurations::
2465
2466         files/defconfig
2467         files/MACHINEA/defconfig
2468         files/MACHINEB/defconfig
2469
2470      Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains
2471      "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set
2472      :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build
2473      system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to
2474      "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``.
2475      Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the
2476      build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``.
2477
2478      You can find out more about the patching process in the
2479      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section
2480      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the
2481      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in
2482      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the
2483      :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well.
2484
2485   :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`
2486      Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part
2487      of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose
2488      you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups
2489      and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the
2490      packages themselves but this is not always possible.
2491
2492      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``,
2493      which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`.
2494      If you create your own file
2495      permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the
2496      distro's layer.
2497
2498      You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the
2499      ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`,
2500      to point to your custom
2501      ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions
2502      setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined
2503      within the :term:`BBPATH` variable.
2504
2505      For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings
2506      table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``.
2507
2508   :term:`FIT_DESC`
2509      Specifies the description string encoded into a fitImage. The default
2510      value is set by the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>`
2511      class as follows::
2512
2513         FIT_DESC ?= "U-Boot fitImage for ${DISTRO_NAME}/${PV}/${MACHINE}"
2514
2515   :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS`
2516      Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they
2517      don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``.
2518      The default value is 0.
2519
2520   :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG`
2521      Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256.
2522
2523   :term:`FIT_KERNEL_COMP_ALG`
2524      Compression algorithm to use for the kernel image inside the FIT Image.
2525      At present, the only supported values are "gzip" (default) or "none"
2526      If you set this variable to anything other than "none" you may also need
2527      to set :term:`FIT_KERNEL_COMP_ALG_EXTENSION`.
2528
2529   :term:`FIT_KERNEL_COMP_ALG_EXTENSION`
2530      File extension corresponding to :term:`FIT_KERNEL_COMP_ALG`. The default
2531      value is ".gz".
2532
2533   :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS`
2534      Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing
2535      fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to
2536      use.
2537
2538   :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS`
2539      Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage.
2540      The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode
2541      and new for generating new keys.
2542
2543   :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS`
2544      Format for public key certificate used in signing fitImage.
2545      The default value is "x509".
2546
2547   :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG`
2548      Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image.
2549      For e.g. rsa2048.
2550
2551   :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS`
2552      Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default
2553      value is "2048".
2554
2555   :term:`FIT_SIGN_INDIVIDUAL`
2556      If set to "1", then the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>`
2557      class will sign the kernel, dtb and ramdisk images individually in addition
2558      to signing the fitImage itself. This could be useful if you are
2559      intending to verify signatures in another context than booting via
2560      U-Boot.
2561
2562   :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
2563      When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class,
2564      this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages.
2565      By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils".
2566
2567   :term:`FONT_PACKAGES`
2568      When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class,
2569      this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to
2570      be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes
2571      that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e.
2572      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you
2573      need are in a package other than that main package.
2574
2575   :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE`
2576      Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED``
2577      during the generation of the root filesystem.
2578
2579      Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages.
2580
2581   :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION`
2582      The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when
2583      compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe
2584      ${DEBUG_FLAGS}".
2585
2586   :term:`GCCPIE`
2587      Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C
2588      Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented
2589      Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute.
2590
2591      By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the
2592      variable as follows::
2593
2594         GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie"
2595
2596   :term:`GCCVERSION`
2597      Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for
2598      compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the
2599      ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file::
2600
2601         GCCVERSION ?= "8.%"
2602
2603      You can override this value by setting it in a
2604      configuration file such as the ``local.conf``.
2605
2606   :term:`GDB`
2607      The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger.
2608
2609   :term:`GITDIR`
2610      The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored
2611      when it is cloned.
2612
2613   :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`
2614      Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish
2615      to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming.
2616
2617      .. note::
2618
2619         If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set
2620         :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately.
2621
2622      You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file.
2623      By default, all locales are generated.
2624      ::
2625
2626         GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8"
2627
2628   :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`
2629      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
2630      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be
2631      passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the
2632      system when the package is installed.
2633
2634      Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe::
2635
2636         GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev"
2637
2638      For information on the standard Linux shell command
2639      ``groupadd``, see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd.
2640
2641   :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM`
2642      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
2643      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be
2644      passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members
2645      of a group when the package is installed.
2646
2647      For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``,
2648      see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems.
2649
2650   :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL`
2651      Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics
2652      and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your
2653      ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics
2654      and serial in the menu.
2655
2656      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
2657      information on how this variable is used.
2658
2659   :term:`GRUB_OPTS`
2660      Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB)
2661      configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate
2662      multiple options.
2663
2664      The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the
2665      :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information
2666      on how this variable is used.
2667
2668   :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT`
2669      Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the
2670      GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB).
2671
2672      The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the
2673      :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information
2674      on how this variable is used.
2675
2676   :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES`
2677      When inheriting the
2678      :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class,
2679      this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input
2680      method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other
2681      than the main package.
2682
2683   :term:`HOMEPAGE`
2684      Website where more information about the software the recipe is
2685      building can be found.
2686
2687   :term:`HOST_ARCH`
2688      The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as
2689      :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system
2690      supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures
2691      supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is
2692      configurable:
2693
2694      - arm
2695      - i586
2696      - x86_64
2697      - powerpc
2698      - powerpc64
2699      - mips
2700      - mipsel
2701
2702   :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH`
2703      Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the
2704      C compiler.
2705
2706      Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what
2707      is being built:
2708
2709      -  :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the
2710         target
2711
2712      -  :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e.
2713         ``-native``)
2714
2715      -  ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e.
2716         ``nativesdk-``)
2717
2718   :term:`HOST_OS`
2719      Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally
2720      the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can
2721      be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for
2722      ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and
2723      "linux-musleabi" values possible.
2724
2725   :term:`HOST_PREFIX`
2726      Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX``
2727      is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`.
2728
2729   :term:`HOST_SYS`
2730      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
2731      system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the
2732      current recipe.
2733
2734      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
2735      on :term:`HOST_ARCH`,
2736      :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and
2737      :term:`HOST_OS` variables.
2738
2739      .. note::
2740
2741         You do not need to set the variable yourself.
2742
2743      Consider these two examples:
2744
2745      -  Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the
2746         value is "i686-linux".
2747
2748      -  Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running
2749         Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
2750
2751   :term:`HOSTTOOLS`
2752      A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that
2753      should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this
2754      filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool
2755      specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build
2756      host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build
2757      is not started.
2758
2759      For additional information, see
2760      :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`.
2761
2762   :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`
2763      A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that
2764      should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this
2765      filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike
2766      :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system
2767      does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of
2768      ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can
2769      use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools.
2770
2771   :term:`HOST_VENDOR`
2772      Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the
2773      same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`.
2774
2775   :term:`ICECC_DISABLED`
2776      Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more
2777      information on this function and best practices for using this
2778      variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`"
2779      section.
2780
2781      Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the
2782      function::
2783
2784         ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1"
2785
2786      To enable the function, set the variable as follows::
2787
2788         ICECC_DISABLED = ""
2789
2790   :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC`
2791      Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This
2792      variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You
2793      set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
2794
2795      If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded
2796      build system uses the default script provided by the
2797      ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not
2798      the one that comes with ``icecc``.
2799
2800   :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`
2801      Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
2802      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel
2803      compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x
2804      represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run.
2805
2806      .. note::
2807
2808         The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the
2809         network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon.
2810
2811      If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the
2812      maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best
2813      performance could take some experimentation since machine speed,
2814      network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all
2815      affect build time. Consequently, unlike the
2816      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no
2817      rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal
2818      performance.
2819
2820      If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not
2821      use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of
2822      cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``).
2823
2824   :term:`ICECC_PATH`
2825      The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in
2826      your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define
2827      this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts
2828      to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``.
2829
2830   :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL`
2831      Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed
2832      compile support to consider. This variable is used by the
2833      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2834      your ``local.conf`` file.
2835
2836      When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting"
2837      them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes
2838      you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
2839
2840   :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL`
2841      Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed
2842      compile support to consider. This variable is used by the
2843      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2844      your ``local.conf`` file.
2845
2846      When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting"
2847      them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages
2848      you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
2849
2850   :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL`
2851      Identifies user recipes that use an empty
2852      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to
2853      force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream
2854      distributed compile support. This variable is used by the
2855      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2856      your ``local.conf`` file.
2857
2858   :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`
2859      The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the
2860      recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``).
2861
2862   :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES`
2863      A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition
2864      when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the
2865      ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default,
2866      the files are
2867      installed under the same name as the source files. To change the
2868      installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon
2869      (;). Source files need to be located in
2870      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two
2871      examples::
2872
2873         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2"
2874         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio"
2875
2876      Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In
2877      this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base
2878      name of the source file path. To install files into a directory
2879      within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;).
2880      Here are two examples::
2881
2882         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*"
2883         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/"
2884
2885      The first example
2886      installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/``
2887      into the root of the target partition. The second example installs
2888      the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition.
2889
2890      You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the
2891      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
2892      section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference
2893      material for Wic is located in the
2894      ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter.
2895
2896   :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES`
2897      A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition
2898      when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the
2899      ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default,
2900      the files are
2901      installed under the same name as the source files. To change the
2902      installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon
2903      (;). Source files need to be located in
2904      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two
2905      examples::
2906
2907         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel"
2908         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}"
2909
2910      Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In
2911      this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base
2912      name of the source file path. To install files into a directory
2913      within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;).
2914      Here are two examples::
2915
2916         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*"
2917         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/"
2918
2919      The first example
2920      installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles``
2921      into the root of the target partition. The second example installs
2922      the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition.
2923
2924      You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the
2925      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
2926      section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference
2927      material for Wic is located in the
2928      ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter.
2929
2930   :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES`
2931      A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use
2932      this variable to specify the list of classes that register the
2933      different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates.
2934
2935      The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can
2936      set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution
2937      configuration file.
2938
2939      For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the
2940      :term:`Source Directory`.
2941
2942   :term:`IMAGE_CMD`
2943      Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image
2944      type, which corresponds to the value set in
2945      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``,
2946      ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use
2947      an override for the associated type. Here is an example::
2948
2949         IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \
2950             --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \
2951             ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}"
2952
2953      You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding
2954      support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this
2955      variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>`
2956      class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``.
2957
2958   :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`
2959      Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that
2960      are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image.
2961      These files list basic device nodes that should be created under
2962      ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set,
2963      ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by
2964      :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write
2965      device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an
2966      example.
2967
2968   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
2969      The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you
2970      configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this
2971      variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the
2972      :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do
2973      not.
2974
2975      .. note::
2976
2977         To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the
2978         :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable.
2979
2980      For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see
2981      the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section.
2982
2983      For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this
2984      variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``"
2985      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2986
2987   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
2988      Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the
2989      build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting
2990      ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root
2991      filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``::
2992
2993         IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2"
2994
2995      For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can
2996      choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`.
2997
2998      .. note::
2999
3000         -  If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are
3001            setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set
3002            ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line.
3003
3004         -  Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this
3005            variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append``
3006            or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or
3007            more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable.
3008
3009   :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`
3010      Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image
3011      through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the
3012      ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues.
3013
3014      Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to
3015      install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally,
3016      "helper" classes such as the
3017      :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can
3018      take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into
3019      auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its
3020      default contents.
3021
3022      When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows::
3023
3024         IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name"
3025
3026      Be sure to include the space
3027      between the quotation character and the start of the package name or
3028      names.
3029
3030      .. note::
3031
3032         -  When working with a
3033            :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>`
3034            image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify
3035            packages for installation. Instead, use the
3036            :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which
3037            allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a
3038            fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``.
3039            For information on creating an initramfs, see the
3040            ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`"
3041            section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3042
3043         -  Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the
3044            :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>`
3045            BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from
3046            within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator
3047            in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since
3048            ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default
3049            value using the
3050            :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>`
3051            operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL``
3052            results in unexpected behavior when used within
3053            ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from
3054            within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the
3055            specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is
3056            contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work.
3057
3058   :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS`
3059      Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the
3060      root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system
3061      automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization,
3062      into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable
3063      ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already
3064      selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is
3065      an example::
3066
3067         IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de"
3068
3069      In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese
3070      and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are
3071      installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as
3072      ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages
3073      only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific
3074      language).
3075
3076      See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`
3077      variable for information on generating GLIBC locales.
3078
3079
3080   :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME`
3081      The name of the output image symlink (which does not include
3082      the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value
3083      is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE`
3084      variables::
3085
3086         IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}"
3087
3088
3089   :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST`
3090      The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed
3091      packages that make up the image. The file contains package
3092      information on a line-per-package basis as follows::
3093
3094          packagename packagearch version
3095
3096      The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest
3097      file as follows::
3098
3099         IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest"
3100
3101      The location is
3102      derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
3103      and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find
3104      information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`"
3105      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
3106
3107   :term:`IMAGE_NAME`
3108      The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable
3109      is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`,
3110      :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX`
3111      variables::
3112
3113         IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3114
3115   :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX`
3116      Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"``
3117      to distinguish the image file from other files created during image
3118      building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can
3119      clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example,
3120      this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes.
3121
3122   :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR`
3123      Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial
3124      image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk
3125      usage value for the image is greater than the sum of
3126      ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of
3127      the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk
3128      space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a
3129      multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in
3130      30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to
3131      determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that
3132      post install scripts and the package management system uses disk
3133      space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does
3134      not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See
3135      ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system
3136      determines the overall image size.
3137
3138      The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room
3139      to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a
3140      small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you
3141      can increase the default value. For example, the following setting
3142      gives you 50% free space added to the image::
3143
3144         IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5"
3145
3146      Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is
3147      added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``
3148      variable.
3149
3150   :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE`
3151      Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the
3152      OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by
3153      the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`,
3154      :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`,
3155      :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or
3156      :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class.
3157
3158      .. note::
3159
3160         The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is
3161         recommended that you do not use it.
3162
3163      The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and
3164      :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE``
3165      for packaging up images and SDKs.
3166
3167      You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the
3168      variable is set indirectly through the appropriate
3169      :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the
3170      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The
3171      OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM,
3172      or IPK) that appears with the variable
3173
3174      .. note::
3175
3176         Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute
3177         packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image
3178         or SDK.
3179
3180   :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
3181      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
3182      system creates the final image output files. You can specify
3183      functions separated by semicolons::
3184
3185         IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
3186
3187      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the
3188      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
3189      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
3190      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
3191      information.
3192
3193   :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND`
3194      Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build
3195      system creates the final image output files. You can specify
3196      functions separated by semicolons::
3197
3198         IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
3199
3200      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the
3201      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
3202      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
3203      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
3204      information.
3205
3206   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS`
3207      The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction
3208      (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This
3209      variable is not configurable. Do not change it.
3210
3211   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT`
3212      Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the
3213      size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is
3214      rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is
3215      "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for
3216      additional information.
3217
3218   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`
3219      Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By
3220      default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added
3221      to the image after the build system determines the image size as
3222      described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``.
3223
3224      This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a
3225      specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an
3226      image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of
3227      free disk space is available, set the variable as follows::
3228
3229         IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880"
3230
3231      For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests
3232      40 Gbytes of extra space with the line::
3233
3234         IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040"
3235
3236   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`
3237      Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded
3238      build system determines the final size for the generated image using
3239      an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for
3240      the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested
3241      additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically,
3242      the build system determines the final size of the generated image as
3243      follows::
3244
3245         if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size:
3246             internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace
3247         else:
3248             internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace
3249         where:
3250             image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image.
3251             overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR
3252             rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
3253             internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications.
3254             xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE
3255
3256      See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR`
3257      and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`
3258      variables for related information.
3259
3260   :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP`
3261      Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an
3262      example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class::
3263
3264         IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3"
3265
3266      In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is
3267      listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable,
3268      the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since
3269      one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted
3270      partition containing the root filesystem.
3271
3272   :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`
3273      Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default:
3274
3275      - btrfs
3276      - container
3277      - cpio
3278      - cpio.gz
3279      - cpio.lz4
3280      - cpio.lzma
3281      - cpio.xz
3282      - cramfs
3283      - ext2
3284      - ext2.bz2
3285      - ext2.gz
3286      - ext2.lzma
3287      - ext3
3288      - ext3.gz
3289      - ext4
3290      - ext4.gz
3291      - f2fs
3292      - hddimg
3293      - iso
3294      - jffs2
3295      - jffs2.sum
3296      - multiubi
3297      - squashfs
3298      - squashfs-lz4
3299      - squashfs-lzo
3300      - squashfs-xz
3301      - tar
3302      - tar.bz2
3303      - tar.gz
3304      - tar.lz4
3305      - tar.xz
3306      - tar.zst
3307      - ubi
3308      - ubifs
3309      - wic
3310      - wic.bz2
3311      - wic.gz
3312      - wic.lzma
3313
3314      For more information about these types of images, see
3315      ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
3316
3317   :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX`
3318      Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and
3319      :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values.
3320      Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a
3321      version string that comes from your external build environment if
3322      desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across
3323      the build artifacts.
3324
3325   :term:`INC_PR`
3326      Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common
3327      ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the
3328      recipe revision as set from within an include file.
3329
3330      Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across
3331      several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its
3332      :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when
3333      the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find
3334      all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the
3335      updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get
3336      complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide
3337      common functionality are upgraded to a new revision.
3338
3339      A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the
3340      ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes
3341      share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to
3342      help define the recipe revision.
3343
3344      The following provides an example that shows how to use the
3345      ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the
3346      variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you
3347      can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You
3348      will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more
3349      granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable::
3350
3351         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2"
3352         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1"
3353         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0"
3354         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3"
3355
3356      The
3357      first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be
3358      used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining
3359      lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the
3360      ``PR`` value is set.
3361
3362   :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`
3363      Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would
3364      appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded
3365      from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed
3366      incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually
3367      licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted.
3368
3369      .. note::
3370
3371         This functionality is only regularly tested using the following
3372         setting::
3373
3374                 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0"
3375
3376
3377         Although you can use other settings, you might be required to
3378         remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that
3379         are required to produce a functional system image.
3380
3381      .. note::
3382
3383         It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be
3384         used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define
3385         a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licenses
3386         that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as::
3387
3388                 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}"
3389
3390
3391         This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of
3392         all licenses from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified
3393         in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES``, thus only allowing the latter licenses to
3394         be used.
3395
3396   :term:`INHERIT`
3397      Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous
3398      functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base
3399      configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build
3400      system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes.
3401
3402      For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the
3403      :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`"
3404      section in the Bitbake User Manual.
3405
3406   :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO`
3407      Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is
3408      unlikely that you want to edit this variable.
3409
3410      The default value of the variable is set as follows in the
3411      ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file::
3412
3413         INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license"
3414
3415   :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS`
3416      Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard
3417      C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`.
3418      This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any
3419      compilation using the C compiler.
3420
3421      Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from
3422      being added.
3423
3424   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`
3425      Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug
3426      information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out
3427      debugging information during the
3428      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on
3429      how debug information is split out, see the
3430      :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`
3431      variable.
3432
3433      To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information
3434      during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as
3435      follows::
3436
3437         INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1"
3438
3439   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`
3440      If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting
3441      packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source
3442      files.
3443
3444      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts
3445      the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``.
3446      Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you
3447      plan to debug in general.
3448
3449   :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`
3450      If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the
3451      resulting sysroot.
3452
3453      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the
3454      resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the
3455      ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit
3456      this stripping.
3457
3458      If you want to use this variable, include the
3459      :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a
3460      ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts
3461      accordingly.
3462
3463      .. note::
3464
3465         Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and
3466         special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building
3467         bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore,
3468         even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist
3469         that are needed for the build that are not strippable.
3470
3471   :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`
3472      Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem
3473      (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the
3474      same as those supported by the
3475      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable.
3476
3477      The default value of this variable, which is set in the
3478      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the
3479      :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's
3480      initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem
3481      `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects
3482      an optionally compressed cpio archive.
3483
3484   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE`
3485      Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image
3486      recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs)
3487      image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an
3488      additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root
3489      filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The
3490      initramfs image recipe you provide should set
3491      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to
3492      :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`.
3493
3494      An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for
3495      early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate
3496      and mount the "real" root filesystem).
3497
3498      .. note::
3499
3500         See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb``
3501         recipe in the :term:`Source Directory`
3502         for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as
3503         the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE``
3504         to "core-image-minimal-initramfs".
3505
3506      You can also find more information by referencing the
3507      ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in
3508      the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class,
3509      and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use
3510      the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable.
3511
3512      If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no
3513      initramfs image is built.
3514
3515      For more information, you can also see the
3516      :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
3517      variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the
3518      kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs
3519      image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
3520      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3521
3522   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
3523      Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by
3524      :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an
3525      extra pass
3526      (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during
3527      kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains
3528      both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs)
3529      image. This makes use of the
3530      :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel
3531      feature.
3532
3533      .. note::
3534
3535         Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a
3536         circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs
3537         recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be
3538         the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the
3539         kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe
3540         since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image.
3541
3542      The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory,
3543      which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`.
3544
3545      Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the
3546      OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the
3547      initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within::
3548
3549         INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1"
3550
3551      By default, the
3552      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a
3553      null string as follows::
3554
3555         INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= ""
3556
3557      .. note::
3558
3559         You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a
3560         configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file.
3561
3562      See the
3563      :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>`
3564      file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an
3565      initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
3566      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3567
3568   :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME`
3569      The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is
3570      set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3571      follows::
3572
3573         INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3574
3575      The value of the
3576      ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3577      file, has the following value::
3578
3579         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3580
3581      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3582      information.
3583
3584   :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME`
3585      The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is
3586      set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3587      follows::
3588
3589         INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3590
3591      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3592      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value::
3593
3594         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3595
3596   :term:`INITRD`
3597      Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an
3598      initial RAM disk (``initrd``).
3599
3600      The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the
3601      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class.
3602
3603   :term:`INITRD_IMAGE`
3604      When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when
3605      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"),
3606      ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to
3607      provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is
3608      "core-image-minimal-initramfs".
3609
3610      See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more
3611      information.
3612
3613   :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME`
3614      The filename of the initialization script as installed to
3615      ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``.
3616
3617      This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``.
3618      The variable is mandatory.
3619
3620   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES`
3621      A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages
3622      are specified, you need to append the package name to the other
3623      ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override.
3624
3625      This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``.
3626      The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN`
3627      variable.
3628
3629   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`
3630      Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example::
3631
3632         INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ."
3633
3634      In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script
3635      in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6.
3636
3637      The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the
3638      :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class.
3639
3640      The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the
3641      ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters,
3642      please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at
3643      https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html
3644
3645   :term:`INSANE_SKIP`
3646      Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a
3647      recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so``
3648      files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the
3649      recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example
3650      is ``${PN}``::
3651
3652         INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so"
3653
3654      See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a
3655      list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable.
3656
3657   :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`
3658      By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file.
3659      Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the
3660      configuration level to disable this behavior.
3661
3662   :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS`
3663      When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on
3664      the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the
3665      target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once
3666      the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades
3667      using the package manager at runtime.
3668
3669   :term:`KARCH`
3670      Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the
3671      configuration. Architectures supported for this release are:
3672
3673      - powerpc
3674      - i386
3675      - x86_64
3676      - arm
3677      - qemu
3678      - mips
3679
3680      You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`.
3681
3682   :term:`KBRANCH`
3683      A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify
3684      the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a
3685      build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch
3686      you want is being used by the build process.
3687
3688      Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the
3689      kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the
3690      ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the
3691      ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH``
3692      is set as follows in that kernel recipe file::
3693
3694         KBRANCH ?= "standard/base"
3695
3696      This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify
3697      the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target
3698      hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's
3699      append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the
3700      BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the
3701      Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA
3702      machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named
3703      ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``.
3704      Here are the related statements from that append file::
3705
3706         KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base"
3707         KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base"
3708         KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter"
3709         KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone"
3710
3711      The ``KBRANCH`` statements
3712      identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported
3713      BSP.
3714
3715   :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`
3716      When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>`
3717      class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use
3718      during a kernel build.
3719
3720      Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a
3721      build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you
3722      would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e.
3723      "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that
3724      is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the
3725      ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the
3726      :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the
3727      ``defconfig`` file.
3728
3729      To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe
3730      using the following form::
3731
3732         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file
3733
3734      Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses
3735      a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig"::
3736
3737         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig"
3738
3739      As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file::
3740
3741         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file
3742
3743      For more
3744      information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the
3745      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`"
3746      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
3747
3748   :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE`
3749      Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to
3750      the kernel image type specified using the
3751      :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable.
3752
3753   :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3754      Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the
3755      name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``
3756      variable.
3757
3758      The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the
3759      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the
3760      following default value::
3761
3762         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3763
3764      See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE`
3765      and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information.
3766
3767   :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES`
3768      A list of classes defining kernel image types that the
3769      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You
3770      typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An
3771      example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and
3772      resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register
3773      custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this
3774      variable.
3775
3776   :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE`
3777      Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e.
3778      the ``.dtb``) file.
3779
3780      .. note::
3781
3782         Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device
3783         tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred.
3784
3785      In order to use this variable, the
3786      :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must
3787      be inherited.
3788
3789   :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME`
3790      The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable
3791      is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3792      follows::
3793
3794         KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3795
3796      The
3797      value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in
3798      the same file, has the following value::
3799
3800         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3801
3802      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3803      information.
3804
3805   :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME`
3806      The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable
3807      is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3808      follows::
3809
3810         KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3811
3812      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3813      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value::
3814
3815         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3816
3817   :term:`KERNEL_DTC_FLAGS`
3818      Specifies the ``dtc`` flags that are passed to the Linux kernel build
3819      system when generating the device trees (via ``DTC_FLAGS`` environment
3820      variable).
3821
3822      In order to use this variable, the
3823      :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must
3824      be inherited.
3825
3826   :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS`
3827      Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded
3828      build system passes on when compiling the kernel.
3829
3830   :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES`
3831      Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build
3832      system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs)
3833      :term:`Metadata` is provided through the
3834      :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH`
3835      variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within
3836      the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for
3837      all BSPs or specific BSPs.
3838
3839      The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments
3840      and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as
3841      config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES``
3842      variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide
3843      validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features.
3844
3845      For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12``
3846      kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs
3847      as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two
3848      statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types::
3849
3850         KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc"
3851         KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}"
3852         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc"
3853         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc"
3854         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc"
3855
3856   :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME`
3857      The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This
3858      variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass``
3859      file as follows::
3860
3861         KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3862
3863      The value of the
3864      ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3865      file, has the following value::
3866
3867         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3868
3869      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3870      information.
3871
3872   :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME`
3873      The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This
3874      variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass``
3875      file as follows::
3876
3877         KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3878
3879      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3880      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value::
3881
3882         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3883
3884   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME`
3885      The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the
3886      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows::
3887
3888         KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3889
3890      The value of
3891      the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3892      file, has the following value::
3893
3894         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3895
3896      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3897      information.
3898
3899   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`
3900      Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If
3901      ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is
3902      checked against the set value during the
3903      :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if
3904      the kernel image file is larger than the setting.
3905
3906      ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a
3907      limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored.
3908
3909      By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the
3910      kernel image is not checked.
3911
3912   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME`
3913      The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the
3914      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows::
3915
3916         KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3917
3918      The value of the
3919      :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable,
3920      which is set in the same file, has the following value::
3921
3922         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3923
3924   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE`
3925      The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine
3926      configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used
3927      when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to
3928      build.
3929
3930      If you want to build an alternate kernel image type in addition to that
3931      specified by ``KERNEL_IMAGETYPE``, use the :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE`
3932      variable.
3933
3934   :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`
3935      Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot.
3936
3937      .. note::
3938
3939         This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload`
3940         variable.
3941
3942      You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it
3943      can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel
3944      module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution
3945      configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe
3946      itself).
3947
3948      Specify it as follows::
3949
3950         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3"
3951
3952      Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build
3953      system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with
3954      the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear
3955      one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use
3956      case::
3957
3958         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name"
3959
3960      For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with
3961      ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable.
3962
3963   :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF`
3964      Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system
3965      expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify
3966      configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to
3967      provide those module configurations, see the
3968      :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable.
3969
3970   :term:`KERNEL_PATH`
3971      The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value
3972      of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within
3973      the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on
3974      how this variable is used, see the
3975      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`"
3976      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
3977
3978      To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build
3979      modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the
3980      :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to
3981      the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables
3982      used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
3983
3984   :term:`KERNEL_SRC`
3985      The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value
3986      of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within
3987      the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on
3988      how this variable is used, see the
3989      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`"
3990      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
3991
3992      To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build
3993      modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the
3994      :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical
3995      to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables
3996      used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
3997
3998   :term:`KERNEL_VERSION`
3999      Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h``
4000      or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting
4001      this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been
4002      configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in
4003      contexts prior to configuration will not work.
4004
4005   :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`
4006      Specifies whether the data referenced through
4007      :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The
4008      ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data
4009      exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to
4010      use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your
4011      ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not
4012      needed avoids a potential dependency loop.
4013
4014   :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION`
4015      Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use
4016      this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration
4017      fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc``
4018      to describe SMP being enabled::
4019
4020          define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP"
4021
4022   :term:`KMACHINE`
4023      The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used
4024      by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the
4025      OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the
4026      OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common``
4027      goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel
4028      understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these,
4029      the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the
4030      OpenEmbedded build system machine name.
4031
4032      These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux
4033      Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the
4034      ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file::
4035
4036         LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0"
4037         COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}"
4038         SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974"
4039         SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711"
4040         KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32"
4041         KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base"
4042         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}"
4043
4044      The ``KMACHINE`` statement says
4045      that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32".
4046      However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as
4047      "core2-32-intel-common".
4048
4049   :term:`KTYPE`
4050      Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration.
4051      The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt"
4052      kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`"
4053      section in the
4054      Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on
4055      kernel types.
4056
4057      You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the
4058      :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The
4059      value you use must match the value used for the
4060      :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the
4061      kernel recipe.
4062
4063   :term:`LABELS`
4064      Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration.
4065
4066      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
4067      information on how this variable is used.
4068
4069   :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`
4070      Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends.
4071      Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency
4072      by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example::
4073
4074         LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)"
4075
4076      In this previous example,
4077      version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against
4078      :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``.
4079
4080      An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version
4081      numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in
4082      the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of
4083      the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``).
4084
4085   :term:`LAYERDIR`
4086      When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable
4087      provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not
4088      available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded
4089      immediately when parsing of the file completes.
4090
4091   :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS`
4092      Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this
4093      layer.
4094
4095      Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a
4096      recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name.
4097      Here is an example::
4098
4099         LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)"
4100
4101      In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared
4102      against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``.
4103
4104      This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be
4105      suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
4106      ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``).
4107
4108   :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`
4109      Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which
4110      a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable
4111      allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the
4112      layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the
4113      system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new
4114      releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained).
4115
4116      To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use
4117      this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file.
4118      For the list, use the Yocto Project
4119      :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g.
4120      &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the
4121      layer, use a space-separated list::
4122
4123         LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;"
4124
4125      .. note::
4126
4127         Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project
4128         Compatible version 2 standard.
4129         The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable
4130         is not set for any given layer.
4131
4132      See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`"
4133      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4134
4135   :term:`LAYERVERSION`
4136      Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You
4137      can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for
4138      another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer.
4139      This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be
4140      suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
4141      ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``).
4142
4143   :term:`LD`
4144      The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker.
4145
4146   :term:`LDFLAGS`
4147      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported
4148      to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software
4149      being built during the compilation step.
4150
4151      Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
4152      being built:
4153
4154      -  :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the
4155         target
4156
4157      -  :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the
4158         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
4159
4160      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for
4161         an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
4162
4163   :term:`LEAD_SONAME`
4164      Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``)
4165      that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its
4166      naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries.
4167
4168      This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class.
4169
4170   :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
4171      Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code.
4172
4173      This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code
4174      files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build
4175      failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any
4176      license change.
4177
4178      This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless
4179      :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED").
4180
4181      For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`"
4182      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4183
4184   :term:`LICENSE`
4185      The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules:
4186
4187      -  Do not use spaces within individual license names.
4188
4189      -  Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice
4190         between licenses.
4191
4192      -  Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses
4193         exist that cover different parts of the source.
4194
4195      -  You can use spaces between license names.
4196
4197      -  For standard licenses, use the names of the files in
4198         ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the
4199         :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in
4200         ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``.
4201
4202      Here are some examples::
4203
4204         LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3"
4205         LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1"
4206         LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
4207
4208      The first example is from the
4209      recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either
4210      the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from
4211      Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code.
4212      The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single
4213      license.
4214
4215      You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle
4216      situations where components of the output have different licenses.
4217      For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2
4218      but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free
4219      Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows::
4220
4221         LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2"
4222         LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2"
4223         LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2"
4224
4225   :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`
4226      Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded
4227      build system to create an extra package (i.e.
4228      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add
4229      those packages to the
4230      :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``.
4231
4232      The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in
4233      ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base
4234      name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and
4235      copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files
4236      from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in
4237      the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata
4238      and copies of files marked in
4239      :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing
4240      license text).
4241
4242      For related information on providing license text, see the
4243      :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the
4244      :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the
4245      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
4246      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4247
4248   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS`
4249      Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through
4250      :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in
4251      order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags,
4252      separate them with spaces.
4253
4254      This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is
4255      typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses
4256      in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information,
4257      see the
4258      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`"
4259      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4260
4261   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST`
4262      Lists license flags that when specified in
4263      :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not
4264      prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise
4265      known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the
4266      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`"
4267      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4268
4269   :term:`LICENSE_PATH`
4270      Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the
4271      OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the
4272      directory that holds common license text used during the build. The
4273      ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other
4274      areas that have additional licenses::
4275
4276         LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses"
4277
4278   :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`
4279      Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration.
4280      The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt"
4281      kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`"
4282      section in the
4283      Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on
4284      kernel types.
4285
4286      If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to
4287      "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the
4288      ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by
4289      the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the
4290      kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources
4291      and configuration.
4292
4293   :term:`LINUX_VERSION`
4294      The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image
4295      being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define
4296      this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the
4297      ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in
4298      ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows::
4299
4300         LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24"
4301
4302      The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV`
4303      for the recipe::
4304
4305         PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}"
4306
4307   :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION`
4308      A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux
4309      kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this
4310      variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel
4311      recipes all define the variable as follows::
4312
4313         LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}"
4314
4315      Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel
4316      configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through
4317      the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension
4318      assuming it was set as previously shown::
4319
4320         $ uname -r
4321         3.7.0-rc8-custom
4322
4323   :term:`LOG_DIR`
4324      Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes
4325      overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``.
4326
4327      For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the
4328      :term:`T` variable.
4329
4330   :term:`MACHINE`
4331      Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define
4332      ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the
4333      :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to
4334      "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated
4335      using QEMU::
4336
4337         MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
4338
4339      The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same
4340      name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus,
4341      when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding
4342      ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in
4343      the :term:`Source Directory` in
4344      ``meta/conf/machine``.
4345
4346      The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped
4347      include the following::
4348
4349         MACHINE ?= "qemuarm"
4350         MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64"
4351         MACHINE ?= "qemumips"
4352         MACHINE ?= "qemumips64"
4353         MACHINE ?= "qemuppc"
4354         MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
4355         MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64"
4356         MACHINE ?= "genericx86"
4357         MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64"
4358         MACHINE ?= "beaglebone"
4359         MACHINE ?= "edgerouter"
4360
4361      The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware
4362      boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer.
4363
4364      .. note::
4365
4366         Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your
4367         configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``.
4368
4369   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`
4370      Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This
4371      variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or
4372      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit
4373      the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable.
4374
4375   :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
4376      A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of
4377      the image being built. The build process depends on these packages
4378      being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential"
4379      variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot.
4380      The impact of this variable affects images based on
4381      ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal``
4382      image.
4383
4384      This variable is similar to the
4385      ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception
4386      that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's
4387      list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file
4388      in this list is not found.
4389
4390      As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building
4391      requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the
4392      hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's
4393      ``.conf`` configuration file::
4394
4395         MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init"
4396
4397   :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
4398      A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of
4399      the image being built. The build process does not depend on these
4400      packages being present. However, because this is a
4401      "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for
4402      the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based
4403      on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal``
4404      image.
4405
4406      This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS``
4407      variable with the exception that the image being built does not have
4408      a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other
4409      words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not
4410      found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel
4411      modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the
4412      kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be
4413      produced.
4414
4415      Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific
4416      touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However,
4417      the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on
4418      the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you
4419      want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the
4420      kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a
4421      "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will
4422      not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the
4423      package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would
4424      use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file::
4425
4426         MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123"
4427
4428      .. note::
4429
4430         In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to
4431         explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake
4432         does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to
4433         satisfy the dependency.
4434
4435      Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen,
4436      keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine).
4437
4438   :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
4439      A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image
4440      being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However,
4441      the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the
4442      packages being present.
4443
4444      This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``,
4445      which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or
4446      ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images.
4447
4448      The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable
4449      with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency
4450      on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will
4451      not build if a file in this list is not found.
4452
4453      An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential
4454      for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a
4455      more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package
4456      containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to
4457      exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon
4458      finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the
4459      firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the
4460      following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine::
4461
4462         MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware"
4463
4464   :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
4465      A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image
4466      being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image
4467      being built has no build dependency on this list of packages.
4468
4469      This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``,
4470      which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or
4471      ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images.
4472
4473      This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable
4474      with the exception that the image being built does not have a build
4475      dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the
4476      image will build if a file in this list is not found.
4477
4478      An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential
4479      For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a
4480      more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the
4481      package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the
4482      WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want
4483      the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package
4484      not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the
4485      module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the
4486      following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine::
4487
4488         MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi"
4489
4490   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES`
4491      Specifies the list of hardware features the
4492      :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related
4493      information on enabling features, see the
4494      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`,
4495      :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and
4496      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables.
4497
4498      For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as
4499      shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section.
4500
4501   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`
4502      Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in
4503      ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``.
4504
4505      This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is
4506      not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference
4507      the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for
4508      all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`"
4509      section for more information.
4510
4511   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
4512      Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be
4513      backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See
4514      the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information.
4515
4516   :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`
4517      A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current
4518      machine. By default, this list includes the value of
4519      :term:`MACHINE`.
4520
4521      You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that
4522      should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU
4523      (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named
4524      ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following
4525      override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``::
4526
4527         MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:"
4528
4529      This
4530      override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated
4531      in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf``
4532      recipe::
4533
4534         SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \
4535             file://wired-setup \
4536             "
4537
4538      The underlying mechanism behind
4539      ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default
4540      value of :term:`OVERRIDES`.
4541
4542   :term:`MAINTAINER`
4543      The email address of the distribution maintainer.
4544
4545   :term:`METADATA_BRANCH`
4546      The branch currently checked out for the OpenEmbedded-Core layer (path
4547      determined by :term:`COREBASE`).
4548
4549   :term:`METADATA_REVISION`
4550      The revision currently checked out for the OpenEmbedded-Core layer (path
4551      determined by :term:`COREBASE`).
4552
4553   :term:`MIRRORS`
4554      Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system
4555      gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it
4556      first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the
4557      build system tries locations defined by
4558      :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then
4559      locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order.
4560
4561      Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky",
4562      the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the
4563      ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository.
4564
4565   :term:`MLPREFIX`
4566      Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a
4567      special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The
4568      variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or
4569      removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable).
4570      ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``.
4571
4572      .. note::
4573
4574         The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is
4575         historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix
4576         rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned
4577         into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well.
4578
4579      To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when
4580      :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a
4581      ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version.
4582      If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other
4583      recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on
4584      "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on
4585      "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not
4586      get rewritten automatically::
4587
4588         do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo"
4589
4590      If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the
4591      following::
4592
4593         do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo"
4594
4595   module_autoload
4596      This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``
4597      variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload``
4598      with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example::
4599
4600         module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm"
4601
4602      should now be replaced with::
4603
4604         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm"
4605
4606      See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information.
4607
4608   module_conf
4609      Specifies `modprobe.d <https://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_
4610      syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf``
4611      file.
4612
4613      You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the
4614      kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine
4615      configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file
4616      for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you
4617      must also be sure to list the module name in the
4618      :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`
4619      variable.
4620
4621      Here is the general syntax::
4622
4623         module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax"
4624
4625      You must use the kernel module name override.
4626
4627      Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on
4628      the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``.
4629
4630      Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to
4631      populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with
4632      ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options
4633      ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``::
4634
4635         module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2"
4636
4637      For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on
4638      boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable.
4639
4640   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY`
4641      Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to
4642      "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the
4643      kernel modules resulting from a kernel build.
4644
4645   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME`
4646      The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in
4647      the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows::
4648
4649         MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
4650
4651      The value
4652      of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the
4653      same file, has the following value::
4654
4655         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
4656
4657      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information.
4658
4659   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME`
4660      The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in
4661      the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows::
4662
4663         MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
4664
4665      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable,
4666      which is set in the same file, has the following value::
4667
4668         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
4669
4670   :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`
4671      Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages
4672      are being built. This variable allows output for different types of
4673      target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same
4674      output directory.
4675
4676      The default value of this variable is::
4677
4678         ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS}
4679
4680      Some classes (e.g.
4681      :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the
4682      ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value.
4683
4684      See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the
4685      :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information.
4686
4687   :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING`
4688      A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the
4689      host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the
4690      ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For
4691      example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is
4692      "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the
4693      value resolves to "Unknown".
4694
4695      This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state
4696      packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with
4697      ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is
4698      checked against
4699      :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that
4700      variable is set.
4701
4702   :term:`NM`
4703      The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``.
4704
4705   :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`
4706      Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a
4707      recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many
4708      licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added
4709      occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files,
4710      which are only applicable to a specific package.
4711      ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does
4712      not exist in common licenses.
4713
4714      The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a
4715      recipe::
4716
4717         NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source"
4718
4719      The following is an example that
4720      uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched
4721      source::
4722
4723         NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt"
4724
4725   :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`
4726      Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages.
4727      Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the
4728      :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the
4729      ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on::
4730
4731         NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1"
4732
4733      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
4734      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
4735      override::
4736
4737         NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1"
4738
4739      It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages
4740      using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them
4741      (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS`
4742      variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and
4743      will install the packages to avoid dependency errors.
4744
4745      .. note::
4746
4747         Some recommended packages might be required for certain system
4748         functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add
4749         packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable.
4750
4751      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
4752      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
4753
4754      See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and
4755      the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for
4756      related information.
4757
4758   :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`
4759      Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe
4760      requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the
4761      ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the
4762      content of the debug package. For example::
4763
4764         NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1"
4765         FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*"
4766         FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/"
4767         FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch"
4768
4769   :term:`OBJCOPY`
4770      The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``.
4771
4772   :term:`OBJDUMP`
4773      The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``.
4774
4775   :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE`
4776      When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class,
4777      this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed"
4778      command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts
4779      that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class
4780      results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the
4781      ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will
4782      use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout.
4783
4784      See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the
4785      :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class
4786      applies these additional sed command arguments. For general
4787      information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the
4788      ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section.
4789
4790   :term:`OE_IMPORTS`
4791      An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what
4792      Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system.
4793
4794      .. note::
4795
4796         Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only.
4797
4798   :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`
4799      The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of
4800      setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default
4801      value is "oe-init-build-env".
4802
4803      If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the
4804      ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name.
4805
4806   :term:`OE_TERMINAL`
4807      Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive
4808      terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake
4809      command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more
4810      information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in
4811      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4812
4813      You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable:
4814
4815      - auto
4816      - gnome
4817      - xfce
4818      - rxvt
4819      - screen
4820      - konsole
4821      - none
4822
4823   :term:`OEROOT`
4824      The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script
4825      is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment
4826      setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this
4827      script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that
4828      contains the script.
4829
4830      For additional information on how this variable is used, see the
4831      initialization script.
4832
4833   :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL`
4834      Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced
4835      binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the
4836      Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``).
4837
4838      The default for this variable comes from the
4839      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this
4840      default by setting the variable in a custom distribution
4841      configuration file.
4842
4843   :term:`OVERRIDES`
4844      A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides
4845      are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively
4846      overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in
4847      ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes
4848      the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being
4849      built, and so forth.
4850
4851      As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in
4852      the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following
4853      assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the
4854      end of parsing::
4855
4856         FOO_an-override = "overridden"
4857
4858      See the
4859      ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`"
4860      section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the
4861      overrides mechanism.
4862
4863      The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the
4864      :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`,
4865      :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and
4866      :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another
4867      important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override
4868      allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration
4869      (``.conf``) files. Here is an example::
4870
4871         FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value"
4872
4873      .. note::
4874
4875         An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES``
4876         in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the
4877         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto
4878         Project Development Tasks Manual for more information.
4879
4880   :term:`P`
4881      The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following::
4882
4883         ${PN}-${PV}
4884
4885   :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA`
4886      This variable defines additional metadata to add to packages.
4887
4888      You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages.
4889      This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as
4890      the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with
4891      the literal separator "\n".
4892
4893      The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable
4894      to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package
4895      specific by using the package name as a suffix.
4896
4897      You can find out more about applying this variable in the
4898      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`"
4899      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4900
4901   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`
4902      The architecture of the resulting package or packages.
4903
4904      By default, the value of this variable is set to
4905      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the
4906      target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the
4907      build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the
4908      SDK.
4909
4910      .. note::
4911
4912         See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information.
4913
4914      However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the
4915      target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the
4916      machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of
4917      :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows::
4918
4919         PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
4920
4921   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS`
4922      Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine.
4923      This variable is set automatically and should not normally be
4924      hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
4925      of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any
4926      noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}".
4927
4928   :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN`
4929      Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so
4930      that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be
4931      included in the default package.
4932
4933   :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`
4934      This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file
4935      found in the ``conf`` folder of the
4936      :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the
4937      OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data.
4938
4939      You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the
4940      variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk
4941      package_tar"
4942
4943      .. note::
4944
4945         While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar``
4946         class has limited functionality due to no support for package
4947         dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that
4948         you do not use it.
4949
4950      The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the
4951      package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages
4952      will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify.
4953      For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file::
4954
4955         PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk"
4956
4957      The OpenEmbedded build system uses
4958      the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK.
4959
4960      For information on packaging and build performance effects as a
4961      result of the package manager in use, see the
4962      ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section.
4963
4964   :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`
4965      Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when
4966      creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger
4967      (GDB).
4968
4969      With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control
4970      where debug information, which can include or exclude source files,
4971      is stored:
4972
4973      -  ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a
4974         ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is
4975         installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are
4976         installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in
4977         ``/usr/src/debug``.
4978
4979      -  "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under
4980         ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from
4981         where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is
4982         installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are
4983         installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in
4984         ``/usr/src/debug``.
4985
4986      -  "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously
4987         described with the exception that no source files are installed.
4988
4989      -  "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously
4990         described with the exception that all source files are placed in a
4991         separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior.
4992
4993      You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the
4994      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section
4995      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4996
4997   :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`
4998      Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are
4999      installing complementary packages.
5000
5001      You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages
5002      when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you
5003      are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install
5004      ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a
5005      particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can
5006      use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular
5007      expressions to match the packages you want to exclude.
5008
5009   :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE`
5010      Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For
5011      example::
5012
5013         PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
5014
5015      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
5016      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
5017      override::
5018
5019         PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name"
5020
5021      If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some
5022      other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's
5023      :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build
5024      system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system
5025      halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with
5026      an iterative development process to remove specific components from a
5027      system.
5028
5029      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
5030      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
5031
5032      See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the
5033      :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for
5034      related information.
5035
5036   :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS`
5037      Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU.
5038      This variable is useful when you build for several different devices
5039      that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS.
5040
5041   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`
5042      Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the
5043      package feed URIs during the build. When used, the
5044      ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed
5045      URI, which is constructed using the
5046      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and
5047      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`
5048      variables.
5049
5050      .. note::
5051
5052         You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS``
5053         variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do
5054         not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common
5055         case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in
5056         all available architectures for the current machine being included
5057         into remote package feeds.
5058
5059      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5060      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5061      defined in your ``local.conf`` file::
5062
5063         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5064                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5065         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5066         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5067
5068      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5069
5070      .. code-block:: none
5071
5072         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5073         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5074         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5075         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5076         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5077         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5078         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5079         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5080
5081   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`
5082      Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The
5083      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a
5084      package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path
5085      lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
5086      and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables.
5087
5088      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5089      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5090      defined in your ``local.conf`` file::
5091
5092         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5093                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5094         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5095         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5096
5097      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5098
5099      .. code-block:: none
5100
5101         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5102         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5103         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5104         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5105         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5106         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5107         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5108         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5109
5110   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
5111      Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the
5112      OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised
5113      of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5114      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and
5115      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables.
5116
5117      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5118      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5119      defined in your ``local.conf`` file::
5120
5121         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5122                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5123         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5124         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5125
5126      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5127
5128      .. code-block:: none
5129
5130         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5131         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5132         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5133         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5134         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5135         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5136         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5137         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5138
5139   :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL`
5140      The final list of packages passed to the package manager for
5141      installation into the image.
5142
5143      Because the package manager controls actual installation of all
5144      packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is
5145      not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This
5146      variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in
5147      general, you should use the
5148      :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify
5149      packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with
5150      the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>`
5151      image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image,
5152      use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an
5153      initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
5154      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5155
5156   :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY`
5157      Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts
5158      to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to
5159      install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable
5160      is generally not user-defined.
5161
5162   :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS`
5163      Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the
5164      :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out
5165      to individual packages.
5166
5167   :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS`
5168      Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and
5169      pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your
5170      post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs
5171      creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool
5172      in order to execute, you need to list the tools in
5173      ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``.
5174
5175      For information on running post-installation scripts, see the
5176      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`"
5177      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5178
5179   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG`
5180      This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a
5181      recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in
5182      recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define
5183      feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over
5184      multiple lines for readability)::
5185
5186         PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..."
5187         PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\
5188             --with-f1, \
5189             --without-f1, \
5190             build-deps-for-f1, \
5191             runtime-deps-for-f1, \
5192             runtime-recommends-for-f1, \
5193             packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1"
5194         PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\
5195              ... and so on and so on ...
5196
5197      The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated
5198      list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can
5199      determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six
5200      order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can
5201      omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The
5202      order is important and specifies the following:
5203
5204      1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script
5205         argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
5206         :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if
5207         the feature is enabled.
5208
5209      2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or
5210         ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled.
5211
5212      3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`)
5213         that should be added if the feature is enabled.
5214
5215      4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`)
5216         that should be added if the feature is enabled.
5217
5218      5. Additional runtime recommendations
5219         (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if
5220         the feature is enabled.
5221
5222      6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG``
5223         settings for this feature.
5224
5225      Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the
5226      ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has
5227      three arguments that determine the feature's behavior.
5228      ::
5229
5230         PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3"
5231
5232      The
5233      ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is
5234      enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure
5235      script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the
5236      other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend``
5237      file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is
5238      added to the configure script instead.
5239
5240      The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true
5241      regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block.
5242      When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe.
5243
5244      If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do
5245      so one of two ways:
5246
5247      -  *Append file:* Create an append file named
5248         recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of
5249         ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the
5250         variable::
5251
5252            PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5"
5253
5254         Or, you can just append the variable::
5255
5256            PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4"
5257
5258      -  *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the
5259         block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf``
5260         or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously
5261         described, you can either completely override the variable::
5262
5263            PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5"
5264
5265         Or, you can just amend the variable::
5266
5267            PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4"
5268
5269   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`
5270      A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the
5271      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting.
5272
5273      Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and
5274      :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to
5275      pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``,
5276      respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that
5277      handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use
5278      ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately.
5279
5280   :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`
5281      For recipes inheriting the
5282      :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting
5283      ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the
5284      normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth)
5285      should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe,
5286      which is the default behavior.
5287
5288   :term:`PACKAGES`
5289      The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the
5290      following::
5291
5292         ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}
5293
5294      During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task
5295      goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES`
5296      variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the
5297      package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one
5298      package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest
5299      (leftmost) package.
5300
5301      Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of
5302      the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the
5303      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated,
5304      unless generation is forced through the
5305      :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable.
5306
5307   :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`
5308      A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for
5309      optional modules that are found in other recipes.
5310      ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it
5311      only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard,
5312      runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another
5313      package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC``
5314      variable, but a package with the module name is never actually
5315      produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt
5316      to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency
5317      failure from the packaging system during the
5318      :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task.
5319
5320      Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and
5321      the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being
5322      satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
5323      (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``.
5324
5325      For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when
5326      you are splitting packages, see the
5327      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`"
5328      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5329
5330   :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS`
5331      Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of
5332      files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this
5333      variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to
5334      perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function
5335      should set :term:`PACKAGES`,
5336      :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and
5337      other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the
5338      desired splitting.
5339
5340   :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`
5341      Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
5342      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify
5343      parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is
5344      usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of
5345      parallel threads ``make`` can run.
5346
5347      .. note::
5348
5349         In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be
5350         called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure
5351         this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function.
5352
5353      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
5354      variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses.
5355
5356      .. note::
5357
5358         If the software being built experiences dependency issues during
5359         the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear
5360         the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For
5361         information on addressing race conditions, see the
5362         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`"
5363         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5364
5365      For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to
5366      override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds.
5367      However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical
5368      CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is
5369      not set higher than "-j 20".
5370
5371      For more information on speeding up builds, see the
5372      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`"
5373      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5374
5375   :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`
5376      Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the
5377      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify
5378      parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of
5379      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`.
5380
5381      .. note::
5382
5383         In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must
5384         be called with
5385         ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy
5386         way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function.
5387
5388         If the software being built experiences dependency issues during
5389         the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can
5390         clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a
5391         workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the
5392         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`"
5393         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5394
5395   :term:`PATCHRESOLVE`
5396      Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this
5397      variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user".
5398
5399      The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the
5400      OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting
5401      the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and
5402      places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the
5403      conflicts.
5404
5405      Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
5406
5407   :term:`PATCHTOOL`
5408      Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the
5409      :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of
5410      three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used
5411      is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the
5412      quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being
5413      patched, it uses "patch".
5414
5415      If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in
5416      the recipe using one of the following::
5417
5418         PATCHTOOL = "patch"
5419         PATCHTOOL = "quilt"
5420         PATCHTOOL = "git"
5421
5422   :term:`PE`
5423      The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The
5424      variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme
5425      changes in some backwards incompatible way.
5426
5427      ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable.
5428
5429   :term:`PF`
5430      Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and
5431      revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and
5432      ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following:
5433      ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`}
5434
5435   :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES`
5436      When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>`
5437      class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf
5438      loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache``
5439      class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e.
5440      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the
5441      loaders you need are in a package other than that main package.
5442
5443   :term:`PKG`
5444      The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build
5445      system.
5446
5447      .. note::
5448
5449         When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override.
5450
5451      For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class
5452      renames the output package, it does so by setting
5453      ``PKG_packagename``.
5454
5455   :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH`
5456      The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context.
5457      ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment.
5458
5459   :term:`PKGD`
5460      Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before
5461      they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to
5462      the following::
5463
5464         ${WORKDIR}/package
5465
5466      Do not change this default.
5467
5468   :term:`PKGDATA_DIR`
5469      Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated
5470      during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the
5471      :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data
5472      for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area.
5473      This directory defaults to the following, which you should not
5474      change::
5475
5476         ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata
5477
5478      For examples of how this data is used, see the
5479      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
5480      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the
5481      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``"
5482      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more
5483      information on the shared, global-state directory, see
5484      :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`.
5485
5486   :term:`PKGDEST`
5487      Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they
5488      have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to
5489      the following::
5490
5491         ${WORKDIR}/packages-split
5492
5493      Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each
5494      package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change
5495      this default.
5496
5497   :term:`PKGDESTWORK`
5498      Points to a temporary work area where the
5499      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata.
5500      The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following::
5501
5502         ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata
5503
5504      Do not change this default.
5505
5506      The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the
5507      package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to
5508      :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally.
5509
5510   :term:`PKGE`
5511      The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE``
5512      is set to :term:`PE`.
5513
5514   :term:`PKGR`
5515      The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default,
5516      ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`.
5517
5518   :term:`PKGV`
5519      The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default,
5520      ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`.
5521
5522   :term:`PN`
5523      This variable can have two separate functions depending on the
5524      context: a recipe name or a resulting package name.
5525
5526      ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the
5527      OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is
5528      normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the
5529      recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN``
5530      will be "expat".
5531
5532      The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file
5533      created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system.
5534
5535      If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix
5536      or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the
5537      native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build
5538      packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash``
5539      and ``lib64-bash``, respectively.
5540
5541   :term:`PNBLACKLIST`
5542      Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build.
5543      This variable works in conjunction with the
5544      :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited
5545      globally.
5546
5547      To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST``
5548      variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that
5549      prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built::
5550
5551         PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization."
5552
5553   :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND`
5554      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
5555      system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify
5556      functions separated by semicolons::
5557
5558          POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... "
5559
5560      If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you
5561      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
5562      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
5563      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
5564
5565   :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND`
5566      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
5567      system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify
5568      functions separated by semicolons::
5569
5570         POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... "
5571
5572      If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you
5573      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
5574      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
5575      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
5576
5577   :term:`PR`
5578      The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is
5579      "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the
5580      values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases,
5581      ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0".
5582
5583      .. note::
5584
5585         The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR``
5586         to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task
5587         :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the
5588         :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and
5589         :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache`
5590         mechanisms.
5591
5592      The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package
5593      manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In
5594      this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of
5595      :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which
5596      package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the
5597      same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with
5598      the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same
5599      upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including
5600      packaging fixes.
5601
5602      .. note::
5603
5604         ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the
5605         package contents or metadata.
5606
5607      Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone,
5608      an automated solution exists. See the
5609      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section
5610      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information.
5611
5612   :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER`
5613      If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines
5614      which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the
5615      preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the
5616      name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using
5617      the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common
5618      example::
5619
5620         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto"
5621
5622      In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel".
5623      The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of
5624      the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel".
5625
5626      Following are more examples::
5627
5628         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86"
5629         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa"
5630
5631      For more
5632      information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`"
5633      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5634
5635      .. note::
5636
5637         If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any
5638         recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined)
5639         by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually
5640         desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually
5641         exclusive alternative providers.
5642
5643   :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION`
5644      If there are multiple versions of a recipe available, this variable
5645      determines which version should be given preference. You must always
5646      suffix the variable with the :term:`PN` you want to select (`python` in
5647      the first example below), and you should specify the :term:`PV`
5648      accordingly (`3.4.0` in the example).
5649
5650      The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use
5651      through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any
5652      number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions
5653      that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are
5654      two examples::
5655
5656         PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0"
5657         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%"
5658
5659      .. note::
5660
5661         The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the
5662         string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other
5663         location of the string.
5664
5665      The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which
5666      does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename.
5667      For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb``
5668      where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment::
5669
5670         PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}"
5671
5672      In this case, the correct way to select
5673      ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following::
5674
5675         PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%"
5676
5677      Compare that previous example
5678      against the following incorrect example, which does not work::
5679
5680         PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git"
5681
5682      Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by
5683      configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use
5684      :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific
5685      override. Here is an example::
5686
5687         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%"
5688
5689      Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the
5690      "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible.
5691      Here is an example::
5692
5693         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%"
5694
5695      .. note::
5696
5697         The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override
5698         only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable".
5699
5700      If a recipe with the specified version is not available, a warning
5701      message will be shown. See :term:`REQUIRED_VERSION` if you want this
5702      to be an error instead.
5703
5704   :term:`PREMIRRORS`
5705      Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system
5706      gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it
5707      first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the
5708      build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream
5709      source, and then locations specified by
5710      :term:`MIRRORS` in that order.
5711
5712      Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky",
5713      the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the
5714      ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository.
5715
5716      Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to
5717      attempt before any others by adding something like the following to
5718      the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the
5719      :term:`Build Directory`::
5720
5721         PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\
5722             git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5723             ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5724             http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5725             https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n"
5726
5727      These changes cause the
5728      build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and
5729      direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use
5730      ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as
5731      well.
5732
5733   :term:`PRIORITY`
5734      Indicates the importance of a package.
5735
5736      ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy
5737      because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for
5738      which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not
5739      normally set within recipes.
5740
5741      You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and
5742      "optional", which is the default.
5743
5744   :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS`
5745      Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored
5746      by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This
5747      variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has
5748      its own private versions of a library normally provided by another
5749      recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the
5750      private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated
5751      packages that should instead depend on the package providing the
5752      standard version of the library.
5753
5754      Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their
5755      file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser::
5756
5757         PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \
5758                         libxpcom.so \
5759                         libnspr4.so \
5760                         libxul.so \
5761                         libmozalloc.so \
5762                         libplc4.so \
5763                         libplds4.so"
5764
5765      For more information, see the
5766      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
5767      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
5768
5769   :term:`PROVIDES`
5770      A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By
5771      default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its
5772      ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it
5773      provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional
5774      aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying
5775      dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by
5776      ``DEPENDS``.
5777
5778      Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe
5779      file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``::
5780
5781         PROVIDES += "udev"
5782
5783      The ``PROVIDES`` statement
5784      results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev".
5785
5786      .. note::
5787
5788         A recipe's own recipe name (:term:`PN`) is always implicitly prepended
5789         to `PROVIDES`, so while using "+=" in the above example may not be
5790         strictly necessary it is recommended to avoid confusion.
5791
5792      In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the
5793      ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A
5794      virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular
5795      functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the
5796      functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``.
5797      Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the
5798      virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open.
5799
5800      Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form
5801      "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part
5802      of the name and has no syntactical significance.
5803
5804      The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is
5805      used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target.
5806
5807      .. note::
5808
5809         A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies
5810         (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any
5811         special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For
5812         example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of
5813         the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory.
5814
5815         Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as
5816         simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file::
5817
5818                 VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev"
5819
5820
5821   :term:`PRSERV_HOST`
5822      The network based :term:`PR` service host and port.
5823
5824      The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the
5825      :term:`Source Directory` shows how the
5826      ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set::
5827
5828         PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
5829
5830      You must
5831      set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR
5832      service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can
5833      set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service.
5834
5835
5836   :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS`
5837      A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored
5838      by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid
5839      problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and
5840      reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list
5841      and can include partial directory (or file) names.
5842
5843
5844   :term:`PTEST_ENABLED`
5845      Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package
5846      Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest)
5847      functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set
5848      this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests
5849      at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it
5850      from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`.
5851
5852   :term:`PV`
5853      The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the
5854      recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named
5855      ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1".
5856      ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is
5857      building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code
5858      repository (e.g. Git or Subversion).
5859
5860      ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable.
5861
5862   :term:`PYTHON_ABI`
5863      When used by recipes that inherit the
5864      :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`,
5865      :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>` classes, denotes the
5866      Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By
5867      default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the
5868      OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you.
5869
5870      The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory
5871      names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in
5872      sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``).
5873
5874      Recipes that inherit the ``distutils3`` class during cross-builds also
5875      use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the
5876      appropriate Python that the extension is targeting.
5877
5878   :term:`PYTHON_PN`
5879      When used by recipes that inherit the
5880      `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`,
5881      :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>` classes, specifies the
5882      major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would
5883      be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the
5884      OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you.
5885
5886      The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the
5887      following::
5888
5889         DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native"
5890
5891      In the previous example,
5892      the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``.
5893
5894   :term:`RANLIB`
5895      The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``.
5896
5897   :term:`RCONFLICTS`
5898      The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages
5899      will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed.
5900
5901      Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in
5902      conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example::
5903
5904         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name"
5905
5906      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
5907      specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies
5908      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
5909      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
5910      ``RCONFLICTS`` variable::
5911
5912         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
5913
5914      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
5915
5916      - =
5917      - <
5918      - >
5919      - <=
5920      - >=
5921
5922      For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or
5923      greater of the package ``foo``::
5924
5925         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
5926
5927   :term:`RDEPENDS`
5928      Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other
5929      packages that must be installed in order for the package to function
5930      correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the
5931      package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be
5932      installed::
5933
5934         RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz"
5935
5936      The most common types of package
5937      runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore,
5938      most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information,
5939      see the
5940      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
5941      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
5942
5943      The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that
5944      ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the
5945      package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the
5946      :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks.
5947      Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used,
5948      which is determined by
5949      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the
5950      corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to
5951      also install the packages on which it depends.
5952
5953      To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the
5954      previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be
5955      added. This dependency is from the recipe's
5956      :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with
5957      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the
5958      ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and
5959      ``baz``.
5960
5961      The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the
5962      names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although
5963      package names and recipe names usually match, the important point
5964      here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS``
5965      variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from
5966      a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable.
5967
5968      Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built,
5969      you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package
5970      name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For
5971      example, suppose you are building a development package that depends
5972      on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following
5973      ``RDEPENDS`` statement::
5974
5975         RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl"
5976
5977      In the example,
5978      the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the
5979      ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of
5980      the variable.
5981
5982      .. note::
5983
5984         ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``
5985         by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file
5986         (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove
5987         ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator
5988         rather than the "=" operator.
5989
5990      The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would
5991      in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable
5992      allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the
5993      :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename
5994      packages), but this final package name cannot be used with
5995      ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be
5996      independent of the package format used.
5997
5998      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
5999      specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies
6000      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
6001      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6002      ``RDEPENDS`` variable::
6003
6004         RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6005
6006      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6007
6008      - =
6009      - <
6010      - >
6011      - <=
6012      - >=
6013
6014      For version, provide the version number.
6015
6016      .. note::
6017
6018         You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version
6019         specification.
6020
6021      For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or
6022      greater of the package ``foo``::
6023
6024         RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6025
6026      For information on build-time dependencies, see the
6027      :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the
6028      ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and
6029      ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the
6030      BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and
6031      dependencies.
6032
6033   :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`
6034      When inheriting the
6035      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
6036      class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist
6037      in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build
6038      system to build the recipe. In other words, if the
6039      ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not
6040      appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
6041      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
6042      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
6043
6044   :term:`REQUIRED_VERSION`
6045      If there are multiple versions of a recipe available, this variable
6046      determines which version should be given preference.
6047      :term:`REQUIRED_VERSION` works in exactly the same manner as
6048      :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION`, except that if the specified version is not
6049      available then an error message is shown and the build fails
6050      immediately.
6051
6052      If both :term:`REQUIRED_VERSION` and :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION` are set
6053      for the same recipe, the :term:`REQUIRED_VERSION` value applies.
6054
6055   :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE`
6056      With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes
6057      whose work directories should not be removed. See the
6058      ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more
6059      details.
6060
6061   :term:`ROOT_HOME`
6062      Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as
6063      follows in the BitBake configuration file::
6064
6065         ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root"
6066
6067      .. note::
6068
6069         This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions
6070         prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep
6071         writeable data in one place.
6072
6073      You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or
6074      in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak"
6075      assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to
6076      define your override::
6077
6078         ROOT_HOME = "/root"
6079         ROOT_HOME ?= "/root"
6080
6081      These
6082      override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly
6083      used override.
6084
6085   :term:`ROOTFS`
6086      Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem.
6087
6088      The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the
6089      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class.
6090
6091   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND`
6092      Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build
6093      system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by
6094      semicolons::
6095
6096         ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6097
6098      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6099      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6100      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6101      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6102      information.
6103
6104   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
6105      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
6106      system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions
6107      separated by semicolons::
6108
6109         ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6110
6111      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6112      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6113      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6114      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6115      information.
6116
6117   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND`
6118      Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build
6119      system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package
6120      management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed
6121      including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``.
6122      You can specify functions separated by semicolons::
6123
6124         ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6125
6126      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6127      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6128      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6129      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6130      information.
6131
6132   :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND`
6133      Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build
6134      system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions
6135      separated by semicolons::
6136
6137         ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6138
6139      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6140      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6141      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6142      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6143      information.
6144
6145   :term:`RPROVIDES`
6146      A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These
6147      aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other
6148      packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by
6149      ``RDEPENDS``).
6150
6151      .. note::
6152
6153         A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list.
6154
6155      As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the
6156      variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an
6157      example::
6158
6159         RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2"
6160
6161   :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
6162      A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being
6163      built. The package being built does not depend on this list of
6164      packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for
6165      extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see
6166      the ``RDEPENDS`` variable.
6167
6168      The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS``
6169      list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can
6170      prevent listed packages from being installed by using the
6171      :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`,
6172      :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and
6173      :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables.
6174
6175      Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced.
6176      However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either
6177      through the :term:`PACKAGES` or
6178      :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the
6179      :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur
6180      during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not
6181      produced, the build continues without error.
6182
6183      Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built,
6184      you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the
6185      particular package whose usability is being extended. For example,
6186      suppose you are building a development package that is extended to
6187      support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the
6188      following::
6189
6190         RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name"
6191
6192      In the
6193      example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in
6194      the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package
6195      by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``.
6196
6197      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6198      specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending
6199      on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
6200      Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6201      ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable::
6202
6203         RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6204
6205      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6206
6207      - =
6208      - <
6209      - >
6210      - <=
6211      - >=
6212
6213      For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or
6214      greater of the package ``foo``::
6215
6216         RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6217
6218   :term:`RREPLACES`
6219      A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses
6220      this variable to determine which package should be installed to
6221      replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the
6222      other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of
6223      the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable.
6224
6225      As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable
6226      in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example::
6227
6228         RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced"
6229
6230      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6231      specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies
6232      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
6233      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6234      ``RREPLACES`` variable::
6235
6236         RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6237
6238      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6239
6240      - =
6241      - <
6242      - >
6243      - <=
6244      - >=
6245
6246      For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2
6247      or greater of the package ``foo``::
6248
6249          RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6250
6251   :term:`RSUGGESTS`
6252      A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation
6253      by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all
6254      package managers support this functionality.
6255
6256      As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this
6257      variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an
6258      example::
6259
6260         RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package"
6261
6262   :term:`S`
6263      The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where
6264      unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is
6265      ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
6266      where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe
6267      version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named
6268      anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is
6269      fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set
6270      ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where
6271      to find the unpacked source.
6272
6273      As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory`
6274      top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at
6275      ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system
6276      uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following::
6277
6278         poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19
6279
6280      The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder.
6281
6282      This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git
6283      repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during
6284      :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different
6285      from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the
6286      source can be located::
6287
6288         SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git"
6289         S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
6290
6291   :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES`
6292      Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for
6293      during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If
6294      any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then
6295      BitBake immediately exits with an error.
6296
6297   :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`
6298      A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has
6299      been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID
6300      followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or
6301      as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with
6302      explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is
6303      not empty and the current value of
6304      :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the
6305      list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the
6306      current host distribution has not been tested as a build host.
6307
6308   :term:`SDK_ARCH`
6309      The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly
6310      set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`.
6311
6312   :term:`SDK_CUSTOM_TEMPLATECONF`
6313      When building the extensible SDK, if ``SDK_CUSTOM_TEMPLATECONF`` is set to
6314      "1" and a ``conf/templateconf.conf`` file exists in the build directory
6315      (:term:`TOPDIR`) then this will be copied into the SDK.
6316
6317   :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`
6318      The directory set up and used by the
6319      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which
6320      the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines
6321      ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows::
6322
6323         SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk"
6324
6325   :term:`SDK_DIR`
6326      The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when
6327      creating SDK output. The
6328      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines
6329      the variable as follows::
6330
6331         SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk"
6332
6333      .. note::
6334
6335         The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of
6336         ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`.
6337
6338   :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE`
6339      Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the
6340      extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the
6341      required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value
6342      "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK.
6343
6344      .. note::
6345
6346         If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure
6347         :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the
6348         artifacts to be fetched as needed.
6349
6350   :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST`
6351      The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all
6352      the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The
6353      file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as
6354      follows::
6355
6356         packagename packagearch version
6357
6358      The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class
6359      defines the manifest file as follows::
6360
6361         SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest"
6362
6363      The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and
6364      :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables.
6365
6366   :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`
6367      When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes
6368      in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data
6369      allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search
6370      results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map
6371      dependencies more effectively.
6372
6373      .. note::
6374
6375         Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA``
6376         variable significantly increases build time because all of world
6377         needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases
6378         the size of the extensible SDK.
6379
6380   :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`
6381      When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible
6382      SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when
6383      :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep
6384      the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable
6385      toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an
6386      IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional
6387      steps to install the toolchain.
6388
6389      The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if
6390      ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if
6391      ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full".
6392
6393   :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST`
6394      A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT`
6395      value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The
6396      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the
6397      default value::
6398
6399         SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc"
6400
6401      Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK
6402      context. You can use this variable to disable those classes.
6403
6404      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6405      configuration, see the
6406      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6407      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6408      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6409
6410   :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`
6411      A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build
6412      system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually,
6413      these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the
6414      build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic
6415      within the extensible SDK.
6416
6417      By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the
6418      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and
6419      excludes the following variables:
6420
6421      - :term:`CONF_VERSION`
6422      - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`
6423      - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS`
6424      - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`
6425      - :term:`PRSERV_HOST`
6426      - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR`
6427      - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR`
6428      - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`
6429
6430      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6431      configuration, see the
6432      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6433      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6434      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6435
6436   :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST`
6437      A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build
6438      system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By
6439      default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the
6440      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class.
6441
6442      This list overrides the variables specified using the
6443      :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`
6444      variable as well as any variables identified by automatic
6445      blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the
6446      value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not
6447      be valid on the system where the SDK is installed.
6448
6449      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6450      configuration, see the
6451      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6452      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6453      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6454
6455   :term:`SDK_NAME`
6456      The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the
6457      :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`,
6458      :term:`SDK_ARCH`,
6459      :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and
6460      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables::
6461
6462         SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
6463
6464   :term:`SDK_OS`
6465      Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The
6466      default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`.
6467
6468   :term:`SDK_OUTPUT`
6469      The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK
6470      output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>`
6471      class defines the variable as follows::
6472
6473         SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk"
6474         SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image"
6475         SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk"
6476
6477      .. note::
6478
6479         The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of
6480         :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is
6481         :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`.
6482
6483   :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`
6484      Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine.
6485      This variable is set automatically and should not normally be
6486      hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
6487      of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any
6488      noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}".
6489
6490   :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
6491      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
6492      system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by
6493      semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6494
6495      If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you
6496      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
6497      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
6498      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
6499
6500   :term:`SDK_PREFIX`
6501      The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The
6502      OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the
6503      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building
6504      ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-".
6505
6506   :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`
6507      A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default,
6508      the following tasks are added:
6509
6510      - do_populate_lic
6511      - do_package_qa
6512      - do_populate_sysroot
6513      - do_deploy
6514
6515      Despite the default value of "" for the
6516      ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added
6517      to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the
6518      ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional
6519      tasks that are needed in order to build
6520      :term:`SDK_TARGETS`).
6521
6522   :term:`SDK_SYS`
6523      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
6524      system, for which the SDK will be built.
6525
6526      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
6527      on :term:`SDK_ARCH`,
6528      :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and
6529      :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS``
6530      variable yourself.
6531
6532   :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST`
6533      The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all
6534      the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The
6535      file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as
6536      follows::
6537
6538         packagename packagearch version
6539
6540      The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class
6541      defines the manifest file as follows::
6542
6543         SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest"
6544
6545      The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and
6546      :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables.
6547
6548   :term:`SDK_TARGETS`
6549      A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the
6550      standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}"
6551      (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built).
6552
6553      The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically
6554      would not be changed.
6555
6556   :term:`SDK_TITLE`
6557      The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default,
6558      this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or
6559      :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the
6560      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as
6561      follows::
6562
6563         SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK"
6564
6565      For the default distribution "poky",
6566      ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)".
6567
6568      For information on how to change this default title, see the
6569      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`"
6570      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6571      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6572
6573   :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL`
6574      An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set,
6575      the value is used as the default update server when running
6576      ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK.
6577
6578   :term:`SDK_VENDOR`
6579      Specifies the name of the SDK vendor.
6580
6581   :term:`SDK_VERSION`
6582      Specifies the version of the SDK. The Poky distribution configuration file
6583      (``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) sets the default
6584      ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows::
6585
6586         SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${METADATA_REVISION}', 'snapshot')}"
6587
6588      For additional information, see the
6589      :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and
6590      :term:`METADATA_REVISION` variables.
6591
6592   :term:`SDKEXTPATH`
6593      The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By
6594      default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO`
6595      variable and is set in the
6596      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as
6597      follows::
6598
6599         SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk"
6600
6601      For the
6602      default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk".
6603
6604      For information on how to change this default directory, see the
6605      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`"
6606      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6607      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6608
6609   :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES`
6610      Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to
6611      the SDK generated from an image using the following command::
6612
6613         $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
6614
6615   :term:`SDKMACHINE`
6616      The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is
6617      built such that it runs on the target you specify with the
6618      ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf``
6619      file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``.
6620
6621      You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable.
6622      The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in
6623      the Build Directory.
6624      ::
6625
6626         SDKMACHINE ?= "i686"
6627
6628      .. note::
6629
6630         You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE``
6631         variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the
6632         configuration will not take affect.
6633
6634   :term:`SDKPATH`
6635      Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that
6636      is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as
6637      the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's
6638      installation script. You can override the offered path when you run
6639      the script.
6640
6641   :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT`
6642      The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK
6643      as it will be when installed into the default
6644      :term:`SDKPATH`.
6645
6646   :term:`SECTION`
6647      The section in which packages should be categorized. Package
6648      management utilities can make use of this variable.
6649
6650   :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`
6651      Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when
6652      building for the target. The flags are passed through the default
6653      value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable.
6654
6655      The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of
6656      ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the
6657      case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used.
6658
6659   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE`
6660      Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using
6661      `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a
6662      value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name
6663      separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device::
6664
6665         SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0"
6666
6667      .. note::
6668
6669         The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the
6670         :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable.
6671
6672   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`
6673      Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using
6674      `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a
6675      value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name
6676      separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices::
6677
6678         SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1"
6679
6680   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK`
6681      Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in
6682      :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against
6683      ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable
6684      allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was
6685      listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in
6686      ``/proc/console``, you would do the following::
6687
6688         SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0"
6689
6690      This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not
6691      with systemd). Note that :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK` also requires
6692      ``/etc/inittab`` to be writable when used with SysVinit. This makes it
6693      incompatible with customizations such as the following::
6694
6695         EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES += "read-only-rootfs"
6696
6697   :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS`
6698      A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine
6699      signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from
6700      another recipe. For example::
6701
6702         SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2"
6703
6704      In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``.
6705
6706      You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the
6707      dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand
6708      side. Here is an example::
6709
6710         SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native"
6711
6712      In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore
6713      task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining
6714      their task signatures.
6715
6716      Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that
6717      affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes.
6718
6719      .. note::
6720
6721         If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship,
6722         the software might break during runtime if the interface of the
6723         second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built.
6724
6725   :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE`
6726      A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change.
6727      The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the
6728      tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to
6729      remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task
6730      signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes.
6731
6732      .. note::
6733
6734         If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software
6735         might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed
6736         after the other had been built.
6737
6738   :term:`SITEINFO_BITS`
6739      Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value
6740      should be either "32" or "64".
6741
6742   :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS`
6743      Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value
6744      should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian.
6745
6746   :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS`
6747      Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM
6748      package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing
6749      prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``.
6750
6751      To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your
6752      ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your:
6753      :term:`Build Directory`.
6754      ::
6755
6756         SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1"
6757
6758   :term:`SOC_FAMILY`
6759      Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On
6760      Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that
6761      you include in the configuration files of all the machines.
6762
6763      .. note::
6764
6765         You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this
6766         variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`.
6767
6768   :term:`SOLIBS`
6769      Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform.
6770      By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is
6771      defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file.
6772
6773      You will see this variable referenced in the default values of
6774      ``FILES_${PN}``.
6775
6776   :term:`SOLIBSDEV`
6777      Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for
6778      shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is
6779      ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the
6780      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file.
6781
6782      You will see this variable referenced in the default values of
6783      ``FILES_${PN}-dev``.
6784
6785   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`
6786      When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e.
6787      creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in
6788      your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all
6789      recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is
6790      compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered
6791      incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or
6792      both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE`
6793      variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables
6794      specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current
6795      machine or host.
6796
6797      .. note::
6798
6799         Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH``
6800         variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words,
6801         do not set the variable during a normal build.
6802
6803   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL`
6804      Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to
6805      first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream
6806      specified in :term:`SRC_URI`.
6807
6808      To use this variable, you must globally inherit the
6809      :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide
6810      the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax::
6811
6812         INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
6813         SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror"
6814
6815      .. note::
6816
6817         You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``.
6818
6819   :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP`
6820      Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in
6821      ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP``
6822      mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file.
6823
6824      For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE`
6825      variable.
6826
6827   :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX`
6828      A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded
6829      build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list
6830      specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such
6831      as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable.
6832
6833   :term:`SPL_BINARY`
6834      The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices
6835      use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development
6836      board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL
6837      binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the
6838      U-Boot recipe.
6839
6840      The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc``
6841      file as follows::
6842
6843         # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that
6844         # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the
6845         # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables
6846         # to allow packaging the SPL.
6847         SPL_BINARY ?= ""
6848         SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}"
6849         SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}"
6850         SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}"
6851
6852      The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form
6853      various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system.
6854
6855      See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the
6856      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
6857      section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide
6858      for additional information.
6859
6860   :term:`SRC_URI`
6861      The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the
6862      OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how
6863      to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs
6864      to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses
6865      a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or
6866      append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include
6867      a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances
6868      of the variable.
6869
6870      The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI
6871      protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher
6872      submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL
6873      parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see
6874      the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the
6875      BitBake User Manual.
6876
6877      -  ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped
6878         with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g.
6879         :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files).
6880         The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH`
6881         variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the
6882         following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of
6883         the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file
6884         (``.bbappend``) resides:
6885
6886         -  ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix
6887            or version numbers.
6888
6889         -  ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and
6890            version but without any special package name suffix.
6891
6892         -  *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files``
6893            and is also alongside the recipe or append file.
6894
6895         .. note::
6896
6897            If you want the build system to pick up files specified through
6898            a
6899            SRC_URI
6900            statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend
6901            the
6902            FILESPATH
6903            variable by also using the
6904            FILESEXTRAPATHS
6905            variable from within your append file.
6906
6907      -  ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control
6908         repository.
6909
6910      -  ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control
6911         repository.
6912
6913      -  ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (openSUSE Build service)
6914         revision control repository.
6915
6916      -  ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository.
6917
6918      -  ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository.
6919
6920      -  ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``.
6921
6922      -  ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``.
6923
6924      -  ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``.
6925
6926      -  ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control
6927         repository.
6928
6929      -  ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision
6930         control repository.
6931
6932      -  ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision
6933         control repository.
6934
6935      -  ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell.
6936
6937      -  ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision
6938         control repository.
6939
6940      -  ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry.
6941
6942      -  ``az://`` - Fetches files from an Azure Storage account.
6943
6944      Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are
6945      standard options:
6946
6947      -  ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default
6948         action is to apply the patch.
6949
6950      -  ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the
6951         patch. The default level is 1.
6952
6953      -  ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should
6954         be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``.
6955
6956      Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision
6957      control system:
6958
6959      -  ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if
6960         :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than
6961         ``mindate``.
6962
6963      -  ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later
6964         than ``maxdate``.
6965
6966      -  ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or
6967         greater than ``minrev``.
6968
6969      -  ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later
6970         than ``maxrev``.
6971
6972      -  ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to
6973         ``rev``.
6974
6975      -  ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to
6976         ``rev``.
6977
6978      Here are some additional options worth mentioning:
6979
6980      -  ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is
6981         an archive. The default action is to unpack the file.
6982
6983      -  ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into
6984         the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when
6985         the Git fetcher is used.
6986
6987      -  ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the
6988         specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``)
6989         fetcher is used.
6990
6991      -  ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into
6992         the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is
6993         used.
6994
6995      -  ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the
6996         tree when using the Git fetcher is used.
6997
6998      -  ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with
6999         ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one
7000         file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example::
7001
7002            SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \
7003                       git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \
7004                       http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third"
7005
7006            SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15"
7007            SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f"
7008            SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de"
7009
7010
7011      -  ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing
7012         the downloaded file.
7013
7014   :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH`
7015      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects
7016      whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so,
7017      the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this
7018      variable to "0" disables this behavior.
7019
7020   :term:`SRCDATE`
7021      The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable
7022      applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager
7023      (SCM).
7024
7025   :term:`SRCPV`
7026      Returns the version string of the current package. This string is
7027      used to help define the value of :term:`PV`.
7028
7029      The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``
7030      configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as
7031      follows::
7032
7033         SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}"
7034
7035      Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the
7036      ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``)
7037      located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory
7038      defines ``PV`` as follows::
7039
7040         PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}"
7041
7042   :term:`SRCREV`
7043      The revision of the source code used to build the package. This
7044      variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note
7045      that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid
7046      performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses
7047      your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision
7048      identifier and not just a tag.
7049
7050      .. note::
7051
7052         For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision
7053         of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable
7054         description and the
7055         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`"
7056         section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7057
7058   :term:`SSTATE_DIR`
7059      The directory for the shared state cache.
7060
7061   :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`
7062      If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in
7063      :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when
7064      fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to
7065      "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if
7066      you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for
7067      your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching
7068      from the network.
7069
7070   :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS`
7071      Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror
7072      locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the
7073      data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS`
7074      and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache
7075      locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects.
7076
7077      You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP
7078      or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state
7079      cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache
7080      you point to can also be from builds on other machines.
7081
7082      When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses
7083      a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure
7084      ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search
7085      paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account
7086      :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the
7087      :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the
7088      following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the
7089      server-provided path server_url_sstate_path::
7090
7091         SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n"
7092
7093      If a mirror uses the same structure as
7094      :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the
7095      end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the
7096      correct path within the directory structure.
7097      ::
7098
7099         SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\
7100             file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \
7101             file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH"
7102
7103   :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`
7104      Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for
7105      hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated
7106      list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters
7107      allowed.
7108
7109      During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state
7110      (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots.
7111      That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation
7112      locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled
7113      by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files
7114      they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather
7115      than the variable being comprehensively set. The
7116      :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list
7117      of files.
7118
7119      For details on the process, see the
7120      :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class.
7121
7122   :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE`
7123      Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7124      directory for the build host.
7125
7126   :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR`
7127      Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7128      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7129      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7130
7131   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR`
7132      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7133      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7134      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7135
7136   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS`
7137      Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration
7138      scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other
7139      software that wants to make use of libraries or include files
7140      provided by the software associated with the script.
7141
7142      .. note::
7143
7144         This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by
7145         ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the
7146         library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use
7147         ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script.
7148
7149   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`
7150      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7151      directory for the build host.
7152
7153   :term:`STAGING_DATADIR`
7154      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7155      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7156      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7157
7158   :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE`
7159      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7160      directory for the build host.
7161
7162   :term:`STAGING_DIR`
7163      Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used
7164      during packaging.
7165
7166      For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs,
7167      see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
7168      task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`"
7169      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the
7170      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`"
7171      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the
7172      :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable.
7173
7174      .. note::
7175
7176         Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR``
7177         directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the
7178         directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to
7179         ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install`
7180         task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of
7181         those files into the sysroot.
7182
7183   :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`
7184      Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which
7185      the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component).
7186      For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's
7187      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies
7188      files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the
7189      ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses
7190      :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on
7191      the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can
7192      have the following values:
7193
7194      -  For recipes building for the target machine, the value is
7195         "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}".
7196
7197      -  For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty
7198         given the assumption that when building for the build host, the
7199         build host's own directories should be used.
7200
7201         .. note::
7202
7203            ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such
7204            as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into
7205            ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes,
7206            standard build environment variables such as
7207            :term:`CPPFLAGS` and
7208            :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths
7209            and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and
7210            headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option.
7211
7212            Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables
7213            should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as
7214            :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`,
7215            :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and
7216            :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system
7217            root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense
7218            for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and
7219            libraries.
7220
7221   :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`
7222      Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building
7223      components that run on the build host itself.
7224
7225   :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET`
7226      Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the
7227      component generates code. For components that do not generate code,
7228      which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match
7229      :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`.
7230
7231      Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but
7232      those binaries in turn generate code for another different system
7233      (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the
7234      primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or
7235      different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries
7236      run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET"
7237      system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used
7238      for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the
7239      sysroot used for the "TARGET" system.
7240
7241   :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE`
7242      Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7243      directory for the build host.
7244
7245   :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR`
7246      Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7247      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7248      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7249
7250   :term:`STAGING_INCDIR`
7251      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the
7252      sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being
7253      built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7254
7255   :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE`
7256      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the
7257      sysroot directory for the build host.
7258
7259   :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`
7260      Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts.
7261      Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts
7262      (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with
7263      the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts
7264      after the kernel has been built.
7265
7266   :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR`
7267      The directory with kernel headers that are required to build
7268      out-of-tree modules.
7269
7270   :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR`
7271      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7272      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7273      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7274
7275   :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE`
7276      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7277      directory for the build host.
7278
7279   :term:`STAMP`
7280      Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path
7281      to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and
7282      then appending additional information. Currently, the default
7283      assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``
7284      file is::
7285
7286         STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}"
7287
7288      For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a
7289      task should be rerun, see the
7290      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`"
7291      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
7292
7293      See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`,
7294      :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`,
7295      :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`,
7296      :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable
7297      information.
7298
7299   :term:`STAMPS_DIR`
7300      Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system
7301      places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``.
7302
7303   :term:`STRIP`
7304      The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to
7305      strip symbols.
7306
7307   :term:`SUMMARY`
7308      The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for
7309      packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default,
7310      ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the
7311      :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is
7312      not set in the recipe.
7313
7314   :term:`SVNDIR`
7315      The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are
7316      stored.
7317
7318   :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE`
7319      Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a
7320      console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as
7321      follows where "X" is the console number you want to use::
7322
7323         SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX"
7324
7325      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets
7326      this variable to null but then checks for a value later.
7327
7328   :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS`
7329      Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set
7330      this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options,
7331      separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``).
7332
7333      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable
7334      to create a set of options.
7335
7336   :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL`
7337      Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off
7338      serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The
7339      variable's default value is set in the
7340      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows::
7341
7342         SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200"
7343
7344      The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
7345
7346   :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY`
7347      Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The
7348      variable's default value is set in the
7349      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows::
7350
7351         SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200"
7352
7353      The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
7354
7355   :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH`
7356      An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when
7357      you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe.
7358
7359      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this
7360      variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the
7361      splash screen.
7362
7363   :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR`
7364      Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default
7365      "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``")
7366      where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the
7367      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task.
7368
7369   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`
7370      Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the
7371      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By
7372      default, the following directories are staged::
7373
7374         SYSROOT_DIRS = " \
7375             ${includedir} \
7376             ${libdir} \
7377             ${base_libdir} \
7378             ${nonarch_base_libdir} \
7379             ${datadir} \
7380             "
7381
7382   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST`
7383      Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the
7384      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You
7385      can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of
7386      directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from
7387      staging. By default, the following directories are not staged::
7388
7389         SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \
7390             ${mandir} \
7391             ${docdir} \
7392             ${infodir} \
7393             ${datadir}/locale \
7394             ${datadir}/applications \
7395             ${datadir}/fonts \
7396             ${datadir}/pixmaps \
7397             "
7398
7399   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE`
7400      Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the
7401      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for
7402      ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in
7403      :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following
7404      extra directories are staged::
7405
7406         SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \
7407             ${bindir} \
7408             ${sbindir} \
7409             ${base_bindir} \
7410             ${base_sbindir} \
7411             ${libexecdir} \
7412             ${sysconfdir} \
7413             ${localstatedir} \
7414             "
7415
7416      .. note::
7417
7418         Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot
7419         (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories
7420         containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged.
7421
7422   :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS`
7423      A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the
7424      sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional
7425      processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files.
7426
7427   :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE`
7428      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7429      this variable specifies whether the specified service in
7430      :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start
7431      automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to
7432      automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the
7433      :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows::
7434
7435         SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable"
7436
7437      You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable".
7438
7439   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`
7440      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7441      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the
7442      configuration file that should be used. By default, the
7443      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7444      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows::
7445
7446         SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf"
7447
7448      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7449      documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7450
7451   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`
7452      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7453      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a
7454      list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot
7455      entry per file. By default, the
7456      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7457      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows::
7458
7459          SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= ""
7460
7461      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7462      documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7463
7464   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`
7465      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7466      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the
7467      boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the
7468      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7469      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows::
7470
7471         SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10"
7472
7473      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7474      documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7475
7476   :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`
7477      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7478      this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found
7479      in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES``
7480      variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to
7481      reside in the recipes main package::
7482
7483         SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}"
7484
7485      If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need
7486      to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which
7487      the build system can find the systemd unit files.
7488
7489   :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE`
7490      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7491      this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package.
7492
7493      When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name
7494      override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is
7495      an example from the connman recipe::
7496
7497         SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service"
7498
7499   :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`
7500      When using
7501      :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`,
7502      specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should
7503      run a `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__
7504      (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to
7505      "0".
7506
7507      The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only
7508      run a getty on the first virtual terminal).
7509
7510   :term:`T`
7511      This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary
7512      files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a
7513      particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows::
7514
7515         T = "${WORKDIR}/temp"
7516
7517      The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which
7518      BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf``
7519      file sets this variable.
7520
7521      The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the
7522      :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of
7523      the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire
7524      build.
7525
7526   :term:`TARGET_ARCH`
7527      The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system
7528      supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures
7529      supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is
7530      configurable:
7531
7532      - arm
7533      - i586
7534      - x86_64
7535      - powerpc
7536      - powerpc64
7537      - mips
7538      - mipsel
7539
7540      For additional information on machine architectures, see the
7541      :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable.
7542
7543   :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH`
7544      Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target
7545      system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from
7546      :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake
7547      configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``)::
7548
7549         TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}"
7550
7551   :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH`
7552      Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target
7553      system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from
7554      :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default.
7555
7556      .. note::
7557
7558         It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to
7559         ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that
7560         would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable.
7561
7562   :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`
7563      This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application
7564      Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for
7565      cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not
7566      compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH``
7567      variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a
7568      different configuration. See the
7569      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the
7570      :term:`Source Directory` for an example.
7571
7572   :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS`
7573      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
7574      target. When building in the target context,
7575      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
7576      default.
7577
7578      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS``
7579      variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that
7580      executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied.
7581
7582   :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS`
7583      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
7584      C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building
7585      in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the
7586      value of this variable by default.
7587
7588      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7589      ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS``
7590      value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags
7591      applied.
7592
7593   :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS`
7594      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
7595      target. When building in the target context,
7596      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
7597      by default.
7598
7599      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7600      ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS``
7601      value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags
7602      applied.
7603
7604   :term:`TARGET_FPU`
7605      Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets,
7606      which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If
7607      not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance
7608      penalty.
7609
7610   :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH`
7611      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system.
7612      ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from
7613      :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake
7614      configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``)::
7615
7616         TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}"
7617
7618   :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS`
7619      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the
7620      target. When building in the target context,
7621      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
7622      by default.
7623
7624      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7625      :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the
7626      ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also
7627      have the flags applied.
7628
7629   :term:`TARGET_OS`
7630      Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to
7631      "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl"
7632      for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and
7633      "linux-musleabi" possible values exist.
7634
7635   :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`
7636      Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools.
7637
7638      Depending on the type of recipe and the build target,
7639      ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows:
7640
7641      -  For recipes building for the target machine, the value is
7642         "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-".
7643
7644      -  For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the
7645         value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``.
7646
7647      -  For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the
7648         variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``.
7649
7650   :term:`TARGET_SYS`
7651      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
7652      system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the
7653      current recipe.
7654
7655      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
7656      on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`,
7657      :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and
7658      :term:`TARGET_OS` variables.
7659
7660      .. note::
7661
7662         You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself.
7663
7664      Consider these two examples:
7665
7666      -  Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the
7667         value is "i686-linux".
7668
7669      -  Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target
7670         running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
7671
7672   :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`
7673      Specifies the name of the target vendor.
7674
7675   :term:`TCLIBC`
7676      Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during
7677      the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no
7678      longer supported.
7679
7680      You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal"
7681
7682   :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND`
7683      Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the
7684      :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the
7685      ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple
7686      variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this
7687      mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept
7688      separate to avoid potential conflicts.
7689
7690      In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of
7691      ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky,
7692      which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set
7693      ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting
7694      in no suffix being applied.
7695
7696   :term:`TCMODE`
7697      Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the
7698      characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the
7699      OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default,
7700      the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The
7701      variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal
7702      toolchain.
7703
7704      .. note::
7705
7706         If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your
7707         responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the
7708         default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these
7709         components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for
7710         the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which
7711         the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go
7712         to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>`
7713         page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE
7714         INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release.
7715
7716      The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`,
7717      which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``)
7718      used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``.
7719
7720      With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external
7721      toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for
7722      this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics
7723      ``meta-sourcery`` layer at
7724      https://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/.
7725
7726      The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the
7727      Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must
7728      be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of
7729      the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable
7730      in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed
7731      the toolchain.
7732
7733      The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external
7734      toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding
7735      support for other external toolchains.
7736
7737   :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR`
7738      The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when
7739      the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set
7740      to "1".
7741
7742      The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to
7743      ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``.
7744
7745   :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY`
7746      Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you
7747      do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a
7748      manner that you to run them outside of the build system.
7749
7750   :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR`
7751      Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The
7752      ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``.
7753
7754      .. note::
7755
7756         Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``),
7757         which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory.
7758
7759   :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`
7760      For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to
7761      control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this
7762      command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action
7763      (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified
7764      command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or
7765      "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then
7766      power on) the device, respectively.
7767
7768   :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
7769      For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to
7770      pass through to the command specified in
7771      :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting
7772      ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you
7773      wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and
7774      non-machine-specific parts of the arguments.
7775
7776   :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT`
7777      The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated
7778      runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout
7779      period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500
7780      seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf``
7781      file.
7782
7783      For more information on testing images, see the
7784      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
7785      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7786
7787   :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`
7788      For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to
7789      connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This
7790      command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward
7791      that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal
7792      program does.
7793
7794      For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device
7795      ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows::
7796
7797         TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
7798
7799   :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
7800      For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to
7801      pass through to the command specified in
7802      :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting
7803      ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you
7804      wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and
7805      non-machine-specific parts of the command.
7806
7807   :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP`
7808      The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address
7809      is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this
7810      variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e.
7811      where the build is taking place).
7812
7813      .. note::
7814
7815         The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of
7816         tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages
7817         from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``.
7818
7819   :term:`TEST_SUITES`
7820      An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when
7821      performing automated runtime testing.
7822
7823      The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can
7824      be used against images.
7825
7826      .. note::
7827
7828         Currently, there is only support for running these tests under
7829         QEMU.
7830
7831      Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add
7832      your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as
7833      follows::
7834
7835         TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest"
7836
7837      Alternatively, you can
7838      provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against
7839      the image.
7840      ::
7841
7842         TEST_SUITES_append = " auto"
7843
7844      Using this option causes the
7845      build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the
7846      image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped.
7847
7848      The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on
7849      another test must appear later in the list than the test on which
7850      they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two
7851      tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on
7852      ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows::
7853
7854         TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B"
7855
7856      For more information on testing images, see the
7857      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
7858      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7859
7860   :term:`TEST_TARGET`
7861      Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a
7862      test image. The default controller to use is "qemu"::
7863
7864         TEST_TARGET = "qemu"
7865
7866      A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets
7867      deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend
7868      the controllers by adding a module in the layer's
7869      ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the
7870      ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used
7871      as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``.
7872
7873      You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``:
7874
7875      -  *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the
7876         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section
7877         in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more
7878         information.
7879
7880      -  *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is
7881         already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it
7882         can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set
7883         :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use
7884         "simpleremote".
7885
7886         .. note::
7887
7888            This argument is defined in
7889            ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``.
7890
7891      For information on running tests on hardware, see the
7892      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`"
7893      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7894
7895   :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP`
7896      The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP``
7897      variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is
7898      set to "qemu".
7899
7900      When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is
7901      an example::
7902
7903         TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201"
7904
7905      Specifying a port is
7906      useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when
7907      your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not
7908      directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address
7909      translation.
7910
7911   :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO`
7912      Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an
7913      image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes
7914      any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU.
7915      Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for
7916      which testing is requested is automatically built first.
7917
7918      These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest``
7919      module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system
7920      over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf``
7921      file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the
7922      OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an
7923      image successfully builds:
7924
7925         TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1"
7926
7927      For more information
7928      on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the
7929      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
7930      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the
7931      ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section.
7932
7933   :term:`THISDIR`
7934      The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is
7935      located. Do not manually set this variable.
7936
7937   :term:`TIME`
7938      The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute,
7939      and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine
7940      seconds past 1400 hours).
7941
7942   :term:`TMPDIR`
7943      This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system
7944      uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the
7945      shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to
7946      ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`.
7947
7948      If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the
7949      default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the
7950      ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`::
7951
7952         #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp"
7953
7954      An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk,
7955      which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS.
7956
7957      The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem
7958      semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and
7959      persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some
7960      implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement.
7961      Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS.
7962
7963   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK`
7964      This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
7965      building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The
7966      packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set
7967      that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each
7968      package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example,
7969      consider the following command when building an SDK::
7970
7971         $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
7972
7973      In this case, a default list of packages is
7974      set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the
7975      list. See the
7976      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section
7977      in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
7978      Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information.
7979
7980      For background information on cross-development toolchains in the
7981      Yocto Project development environment, see the
7982      ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`"
7983      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For
7984      information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the
7985      :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual.
7986
7987   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`
7988      This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The
7989      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets
7990      the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows::
7991
7992         TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}"
7993
7994      See
7995      the :term:`SDK_NAME` and
7996      :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional
7997      information.
7998
7999   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK`
8000      This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
8001      it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the
8002      target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this
8003      variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs
8004      on the target. See the
8005      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section
8006      in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
8007      Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information.
8008
8009      For background information on cross-development toolchains in the
8010      Yocto Project development environment, see the
8011      ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`"
8012      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For
8013      information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the
8014      :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual.
8015
8016   :term:`TOPDIR`
8017      The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake
8018      automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build
8019      environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`.
8020
8021   :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH`
8022      A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This
8023      variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where
8024      underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In
8025      this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in
8026      ``TARGET_ARCH``.
8027
8028      Do not edit this variable.
8029
8030   :term:`TUNE_ARCH`
8031      The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e.
8032      ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses
8033      this value to setup configuration.
8034
8035      ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The
8036      definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically
8037      adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at
8038      the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the
8039      ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the
8040      :term:`Source Directory` provides information for
8041      ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture.
8042
8043      ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to
8044      :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target
8045      machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file
8046      (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows::
8047
8048         TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}"
8049
8050      The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures
8051      are configurable, shows supported machine architectures:
8052
8053      - arm
8054      - i586
8055      - x86_64
8056      - powerpc
8057      - powerpc64
8058      - mips
8059      - mipsel
8060
8061   :term:`TUNE_ASARGS`
8062      Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target
8063      system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8064      ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8065      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8066      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the
8067      ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags
8068      for the x86 architecture as follows::
8069
8070         TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}"
8071
8072      .. note::
8073
8074         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8075         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8076         supply its own set of flags).
8077
8078   :term:`TUNE_CCARGS`
8079      Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target
8080      system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8081      ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8082      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8083      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`.
8084
8085      .. note::
8086
8087         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8088         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8089         supply its own set of flags).
8090
8091   :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`
8092      Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific
8093      processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow
8094      arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on
8095      the features.
8096
8097      The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they
8098      are not conflicting and that they are supported.
8099
8100      The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines
8101      ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows::
8102
8103         TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}"
8104
8105      See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information.
8106
8107   :term:`TUNE_LDARGS`
8108      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system.
8109      The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8110      ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8111      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8112      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the
8113      ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags
8114      for the x86 architecture as follows::
8115
8116         TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}"
8117
8118      .. note::
8119
8120         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8121         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8122         supply its own set of flags).
8123
8124   :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`
8125      The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define
8126      the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific
8127      tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows::
8128
8129         TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune"
8130
8131      These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine
8132      include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in
8133      the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file::
8134
8135         TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32"
8136
8137   :term:`TUNEABI`
8138      An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular
8139      tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt
8140      libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``,
8141      :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and
8142      :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check
8143      compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries.
8144
8145      If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the
8146      :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is
8147      used.
8148
8149   :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`
8150      If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the
8151      :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable.
8152      Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the
8153      ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and
8154      :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a
8155      tuning against their selection of libraries.
8156
8157      See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the
8158      variable is used.
8159
8160   :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST`
8161      A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If
8162      ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers
8163      that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``,
8164      :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI``
8165      variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection
8166      of libraries.
8167
8168      See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the
8169      variable is used.
8170
8171   :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]`
8172      Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features
8173      that conflict with feature.
8174
8175      Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in
8176      the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from
8177      the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file
8178      that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32"
8179      feature::
8180
8181         TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64"
8182
8183   :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]`
8184      Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning
8185      feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features
8186      are specified in the machine include files (e.g.
8187      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example
8188      from that file::
8189
8190         TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode."
8191
8192      See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory`
8193      for these features.
8194
8195   :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG`
8196      Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can
8197      also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual
8198      cases.
8199
8200      Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. ::
8201
8202         UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd"
8203         UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard"
8204         UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config"
8205         UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs"
8206         UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config"
8207
8208      In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the
8209      ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines
8210      "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the
8211      "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-Boot image.
8212
8213      For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the
8214      :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>`
8215      class.
8216
8217   :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`
8218      Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-Boot. During FIT
8219      image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in
8220      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify
8221      the load address to be used in
8222      creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image.
8223
8224   :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`
8225      Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-Boot.  During FIT
8226      image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in
8227      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in
8228      creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image.
8229
8230   :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`
8231      Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image
8232      creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a
8233      command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility.
8234
8235   :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`
8236      Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image
8237      creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a
8238      command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility.
8239
8240   :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION`
8241      Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot
8242      image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built
8243      was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be
8244      "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement::
8245
8246         UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto"
8247
8248   :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE`
8249      Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building
8250      a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform
8251      configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine
8252      configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``).
8253
8254      Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type"
8255      section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable.
8256
8257   :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET`
8258      Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target
8259      is "all".
8260
8261   :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE`
8262      Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the
8263      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to assemble
8264      the FIT image. This can be used to substitute an alternative command, wrapper
8265      script or function if desired. The default is "uboot-mkimage".
8266
8267   :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS`
8268      Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D'
8269      feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class.
8270      If ``UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS`` is not set then kernel-fitimage will not
8271      pass the ``-D`` option to mkimage.
8272
8273   :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN`
8274      Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the
8275      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to sign
8276      the FIT image after it has been assembled (if enabled). This can be used
8277      to substitute an alternative command, wrapper script or function if
8278      desired. The default is "${:term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE`}".
8279
8280   :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN_ARGS`
8281      Optionally specifies additional arguments for the
8282      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to pass to the
8283      mkimage command when signing the FIT image.
8284
8285   :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`
8286      Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image.
8287      During FIT image creation, the
8288      ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used
8289      in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the
8290      entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for
8291      the FIT image.
8292
8293   :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`
8294      Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image.
8295      During FIT image creation, the
8296      ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used
8297      in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the
8298      load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for
8299      the FIT image.
8300
8301   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE`
8302      Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0".
8303
8304   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR`
8305      Location of the directory containing the RSA key and
8306      certificate used for signing FIT image.
8307
8308   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME`
8309      The name of keys used for signing U-Boot FIT image stored in
8310      :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt
8311      certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have
8312      :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev".
8313
8314   :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX`
8315      Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb``
8316      has a ``.sb`` extension.
8317
8318      The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin``
8319
8320   :term:`UBOOT_TARGET`
8321      Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed
8322      directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do
8323      not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process
8324      passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building
8325      process.
8326
8327   :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`
8328      Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script
8329      as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the
8330      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid
8331      configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g.
8332      should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
8333      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`).
8334      However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all
8335      configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some
8336      configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a
8337      warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added
8338      to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``.
8339
8340      The configure arguments check that uses
8341      ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the
8342      :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the
8343      recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class.
8344
8345   :term:`UPDATERCPN`
8346      For recipes inheriting the
8347      :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN``
8348      specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled.
8349
8350      The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that
8351      install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe,
8352      you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes.
8353
8354   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`
8355      You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream
8356      source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If
8357      the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the
8358      OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by
8359      picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags.
8360
8361      You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a
8362      regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the
8363      default filter not work correctly.
8364      ::
8365
8366         UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex"
8367
8368   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`
8369      Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different
8370      regular expression instead of the default one when the package
8371      checking system is parsing the page found using
8372      :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`.
8373      ::
8374
8375         UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex"
8376
8377   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`
8378      You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream
8379      source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If
8380      the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is
8381      determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and
8382      attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work,
8383      you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that
8384      contains the link to the latest tarball.
8385      ::
8386
8387         UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url"
8388
8389   :term:`USE_DEVFS`
8390      Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The
8391      default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is
8392      specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a
8393      statically populated ``/dev`` directory.
8394
8395      See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in
8396      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to
8397      use this variable.
8398
8399   :term:`USE_VT`
8400      When using
8401      :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`,
8402      determines whether or not to run a
8403      `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any
8404      virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those
8405      terminals.
8406
8407      The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is
8408      specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the
8409      machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical
8410      display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal
8411      functionality.
8412
8413   :term:`USER_CLASSES`
8414      A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the
8415      OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g.
8416      ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth).
8417
8418      The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file::
8419
8420         USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink"
8421
8422      For more information, see
8423      ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
8424
8425   :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`
8426      If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce
8427      an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group
8428      identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files
8429      listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and
8430      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to
8431      ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead.
8432
8433      The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply
8434      ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the
8435      ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan
8436      on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should
8437      set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf``
8438      file as follows::
8439
8440         USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error"
8441
8442      Overriding the
8443      default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set
8444      static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the
8445      :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`,
8446      :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and
8447      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables.
8448
8449      .. note::
8450
8451         There is a difference in behavior between setting
8452         ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``.
8453         When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for
8454         every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set
8455         to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually
8456         built.
8457         This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you
8458         know will never be built.
8459
8460   :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`
8461      Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group
8462      identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system
8463      adds a group to the system during package installation.
8464
8465      When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the
8466      OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a
8467      ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the
8468      variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file::
8469
8470
8471         USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group"
8472
8473      .. note::
8474
8475         Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids"
8476         causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values.
8477
8478   :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES`
8479      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
8480      this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe
8481      that require users and/or groups to be added.
8482
8483      You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For
8484      example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in
8485      a recipe::
8486
8487         USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}"
8488
8489      .. note::
8490
8491         It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES``
8492         variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`,
8493         :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables.
8494
8495   :term:`USERADD_PARAM`
8496      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
8497      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to
8498      the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the
8499      package is installed.
8500
8501      Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe::
8502
8503         USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \
8504                                --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \
8505                                --user-group messagebus"
8506
8507      For information on the
8508      standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see
8509      https://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd.
8510
8511   :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`
8512      Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user
8513      identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system
8514      adds a user to the system during package installation.
8515
8516      When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the
8517      OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a
8518      ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the
8519      variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file::
8520
8521         USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd"
8522
8523      .. note::
8524
8525         Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids"
8526         causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values.
8527
8528   :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`
8529      When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system
8530      to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and
8531      ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`.
8532
8533      To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification
8534      (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf``
8535      file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids"
8536
8537      .. note::
8538
8539         Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid``
8540         values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the
8541         :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class.
8542
8543      If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also
8544      specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the
8545      :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and
8546      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables.
8547      Additionally, you should also set the
8548      :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable.
8549
8550   :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`
8551      Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory,
8552      which is used to house postinstall target log files.
8553
8554      By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the
8555      file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the
8556      variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent.
8557
8558   :term:`WARN_QA`
8559      Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as
8560      warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in
8561      your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you
8562      can control with this variable, see the
8563      ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section.
8564
8565   :term:`WKS_FILE`
8566      Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the
8567      OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image
8568      (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned
8569      image, see the
8570      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
8571      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on
8572      the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" Chapter.
8573
8574   :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`
8575      When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists
8576      build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only
8577      applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when
8578      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related
8579      to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has
8580      no effect.
8581
8582      The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the
8583      :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in
8584      your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the
8585      ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable.
8586
8587      With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to
8588      specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools,
8589      bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images.
8590      Following is an example::
8591
8592         WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool"
8593
8594      In the
8595      previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual
8596      native tool on which the build would depend.
8597
8598   :term:`WORKDIR`
8599      The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build
8600      system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the
8601      :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to
8602      the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built.
8603
8604      The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows::
8605
8606         ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
8607
8608      The actual directory depends on several things:
8609
8610      -  :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory
8611      -  :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier
8612      -  :term:`PN`: The recipe name
8613      -  :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which
8614         is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank)
8615      -  :term:`PV`: The recipe version
8616      -  :term:`PR`: The recipe revision
8617
8618      As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name
8619      ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a
8620      ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose
8621      your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work
8622      directory the build system uses to build the package would be as
8623      follows::
8624
8625         poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
8626
8627   :term:`XSERVER`
8628      Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X
8629      server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image
8630      directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps
8631      indirectly, includes "x11-base" in
8632      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
8633
8634      The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine
8635      configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev".
8636
8637